# Official Journal L 313/30 N

| | ISSN 1725-2555 |
| --- | --- |
| Official Journal
  of the European Union | L 313 |
| | |
| English edition | Legislation | Volume 5030 November 2007 |

ISSN 1725-2555

Official Journal

of the European Union

L 313

English edition

Legislation

Volume 5030 November 2007

---

| Contents | | II   Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is not obligatory | page |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | ACTS ADOPTED BY BODIES CREATED BY INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS |
| | * | Regulation No 95 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision | 1 |
| | * | Regulation No 16 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of: | 58 |

Contents

II   Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is not obligatory

page

ACTS ADOPTED BY BODIES CREATED BY INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS

*

Regulation No 95 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision

1

*

Regulation No 16 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of:

58

| EN | Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.
  The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk. |
| --- | --- |

EN

Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.

The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk.

---

II Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is not obligatory

ACTS ADOPTED BY BODIES CREATED BY INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS

| 30.11.2007 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 313/1 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

30.11.2007

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 313/1

---

Regulation No 95 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision

Addendum 94: Regulation No 95

Only the original UN/ECE texts have legal effect under international public law. The status and date of entry into force of this Regulation should be checked in the latest version of the UN/ECE status document TRANS/WP.29/343, available at: http://www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/wp29wgs/wp29gen/wp29fdocstts.html.

Incorporating all valid text up to:

Incorporating all valid text up to:

Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 12 August 2004

Corrigendum of 21 February 2005

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Specifications and tests |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Modification of the vehicle type |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Production definitely discontinued |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Transitional provisions |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Names and addresses of technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

11.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1: | Communication concerning the approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type with regard to protection of occupants in the event of a lateral collision, pursuant to Regulation No 95 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1:

| Annex 2: | Arrangements of the approval mark |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2:

| Annex 3: | Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles |
| --- | --- |

Annex 3:

| Appendix 1 — | Description of the three dimensional ‘H’ point machine (3-D H machine) |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 1 —

| Appendix 2 — | Three dimensional reference system |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 2 —

| Appendix 3 — | Reference data concerning seating positions |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 3 —

| Annex 4: | Collision test procedure |
| --- | --- |

Annex 4:

| Appendix 1 — | Determination of performance data GE.95-22782 |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 1 —

| Appendix 2 — | The procedure for calculating the viscous criterion for EUROSID 1 |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 2 —

| Annex 5: | Mobile deformable barrier characteristics |
| --- | --- |

Annex 5:

| Appendix 1 — | Force-deflection curves for static tests |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 1 —

| Appendix 2 — | Force-deflection curves for dynamic tests |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 2 —

| Annex 6: | Technical description of the side impact dummy |
| --- | --- |

Annex 6:

| Annex 7: | Installation of the side impact dummy |
| --- | --- |

Annex 7:

| Annex 8: | Partial test |
| --- | --- |

Annex 8:

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to the lateral collision behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment of M1 and N1 categories of vehicles where the R point of the lowest seat is not more than 700 mm from ground level when the vehicle is in the condition corresponding to the reference mass defined in paragraph 2.10 of this Regulation.

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this Regulation:

| 2.1. | ‘Approval of a vehicle’ means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

‘Approval of a vehicle’ means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;

| 2.2. | ‘Vehicle type’ means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as: |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

‘Vehicle type’ means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:

| 2.2.1. | the length, width and ground clearance of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

the length, width and ground clearance of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;

| 2.2.2. | the structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the side walls of the passenger compartment in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

the structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the side walls of the passenger compartment in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;

| 2.2.3. | the lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective systems, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

the lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective systems, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;

| 2.2.4. | the siting of the engine (front, rear or centre); |
| --- | --- |

2.2.4.

the siting of the engine (front, rear or centre);

| 2.2.5. | the unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.5.

the unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;

| 2.2.6. | the optional arrangements or interior fittings in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.6.

the optional arrangements or interior fittings in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;

| 2.2.7. | the type of front seat(s) and position of the ‘R’ point in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.7.

the type of front seat(s) and position of the ‘R’ point in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;

| 2.3. | ‘Passenger compartment’ means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

‘Passenger compartment’ means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;

| 2.4. | ‘R point’ or ‘seating reference point’ means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which: |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

‘R point’ or ‘seating reference point’ means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:

| 2.4.1. | has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure; |
| --- | --- |

2.4.1.

has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;

| 2.4.2. | corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him; |
| --- | --- |

2.4.2.

corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him;

| 2.5. | ‘H point’ is as established by annex 3 to this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

‘H point’ is as established by annex 3 to this Regulation;

| 2.6. | ‘Capacity of the fuel tank’ means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

‘Capacity of the fuel tank’ means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle;

| 2.7. | ‘Transverse plane’ means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal vertical plane of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

‘Transverse plane’ means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal vertical plane of the vehicle;

| 2.8. | ‘Protective system’ means devices intended to restrain and/or protect the occupants; |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

‘Protective system’ means devices intended to restrain and/or protect the occupants;

| 2.9. | ‘Type of protective system’ means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as their:






  — | technology |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.9.

‘Type of protective system’ means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as their:

—

technology

| — | geometry |
| --- | --- |

—

geometry

| — | constituent materials; |
| --- | --- |

—

constituent materials;

| 2.10. | ‘Reference mass’ means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a mass of 100 kg (that is the mass of the side impact dummy and its instrumentation); |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

‘Reference mass’ means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a mass of 100 kg (that is the mass of the side impact dummy and its instrumentation);

| 2.11. | ‘Unladen mass’ means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank filled to 90 per cent of its capacity and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable; |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

‘Unladen mass’ means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank filled to 90 per cent of its capacity and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;

| 2.12. | ‘Mobile deformable barrier’ means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor; |
| --- | --- |

2.12.

‘Mobile deformable barrier’ means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor;

| 2.13. | ‘Impactor’ means a crushable section mounted on the front of mobile deformable barrier; |
| --- | --- |

2.13.

‘Impactor’ means a crushable section mounted on the front of mobile deformable barrier;

| 2.14. | ‘Trolley’ means a wheeled frame free to travel along its longitudinal axis at the point of impact. Its front supports the impactor. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.

‘Trolley’ means a wheeled frame free to travel along its longitudinal axis at the point of impact. Its front supports the impactor.

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

| 3.1. | The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative.

| 3.2. | It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars:

| 3.2.1. | a detailed description of the vehicle type with respect to its structure, dimensions, lines and constitutent materials; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

a detailed description of the vehicle type with respect to its structure, dimensions, lines and constitutent materials;

| 3.2.2. | photographs and/or diagrams and drawings of the vehicle showing the vehicle type in front, side and rear elevation and design details of the lateral part of the structure; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

photographs and/or diagrams and drawings of the vehicle showing the vehicle type in front, side and rear elevation and design details of the lateral part of the structure;

| 3.2.3. | particulars of the vehicle's mass as defined by paragraph 2.11. of this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

particulars of the vehicle's mass as defined by paragraph 2.11. of this Regulation;

| 3.2.4. | the lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

the lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment;

| 3.2.5. | a description of the relevant side interior fittings and protective systems installed in the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

a description of the relevant side interior fittings and protective systems installed in the vehicle.

| 3.3. | The applicant for approval shall be entitled to present any data and results of tests carried out which make it possible to establish that compliance with the requirements can be achieved on prototype vehicles with a sufficient degree of accuracy. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

The applicant for approval shall be entitled to present any data and results of tests carried out which make it possible to establish that compliance with the requirements can be achieved on prototype vehicles with a sufficient degree of accuracy.

| 3.4. | A vehicle which is representative of the type to be approved shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the approval tests. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

A vehicle which is representative of the type to be approved shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the approval tests.

| 3.4.1. | A vehicle not comprising all the components proper to the type may be accepted for tests provided that it can be shown that the absence of the components omitted has no detrimental effect on the performance prescribed in the requirements of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

A vehicle not comprising all the components proper to the type may be accepted for tests provided that it can be shown that the absence of the components omitted has no detrimental effect on the performance prescribed in the requirements of this Regulation.

| 3.4.2. | It shall be the responsibility of the applicant for approval to show that the application of paragraph 3.4.1 is in compliance with the requirements of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.2.

It shall be the responsibility of the applicant for approval to show that the application of paragraph 3.4.1 is in compliance with the requirements of this Regulation.

4.   APPROVAL

| 4.1. | If the vehicle type submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation meets the requirements of paragraph 5 below, approval of that vehicle type shall be granted. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

If the vehicle type submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation meets the requirements of paragraph 5 below, approval of that vehicle type shall be granted.

| 4.2. | In case of doubt, account shall be taken, when verifying the conformity of the vehicle to the requirements of this Regulation, of any data or test results provided by the manufacturer which can be taken into consideration in validating the approval test carried out by the technical service. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

In case of doubt, account shall be taken, when verifying the conformity of the vehicle to the requirements of this Regulation, of any data or test results provided by the manufacturer which can be taken into consideration in validating the approval test carried out by the technical service.

| 4.3. | An aproval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 01 corresponding to the 01 series of amendments) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same approval number to another vehicle type. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

An aproval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 01 corresponding to the 01 series of amendments) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same approval number to another vehicle type.

| 4.4. | Notice of approval or of extension or of refusal of approval of a vehicle type pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated by the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in annex 1 to this Regulation and photographs and/or diagrams and drawings supplied by the applicant for approval, in a format not exceeding A4 (210 × 297) mm or folded to that format and on an appropriate scale. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

Notice of approval or of extension or of refusal of approval of a vehicle type pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated by the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in annex 1 to this Regulation and photographs and/or diagrams and drawings supplied by the applicant for approval, in a format not exceeding A4 (210 × 297) mm or folded to that format and on an appropriate scale.

| 4.5. | There shall be affixed to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation, conspicuously and in a readily accessible place specified on the approval form, an international approval mark consisting of: |
| --- | --- |

4.5.

There shall be affixed to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation, conspicuously and in a readily accessible place specified on the approval form, an international approval mark consisting of:

| 4.5.1. | a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (1); |
| --- | --- |

4.5.1.

a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (1

| 4.5.2. | the number of this Regulation, followed by the letter ‘R’, a dash and the approval number, to the right of the circle prescribed in paragraph 4.5.1. |
| --- | --- |

4.5.2.

the number of this Regulation, followed by the letter ‘R’, a dash and the approval number, to the right of the circle prescribed in paragraph 4.5.1.

| 4.6. | If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under one or more other Regulations annexed to the Agreement, in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation, the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.5.1 need not be repeated; in this case the Regulation and approval numbers and the additional symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation shall be placed in vertical columns to the right of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.5.1. |
| --- | --- |

4.6.

If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under one or more other Regulations annexed to the Agreement, in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation, the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.5.1 need not be repeated; in this case the Regulation and approval numbers and the additional symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation shall be placed in vertical columns to the right of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.5.1.

| 4.7. | The approval mark shall be clearly legible and shall be indelible. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.

The approval mark shall be clearly legible and shall be indelible.

| 4.8. | The approval mark shall be placed close to or on the vehicle data plate affixed by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.8.

The approval mark shall be placed close to or on the vehicle data plate affixed by the manufacturer.

| 4.9. | Annex 2 to this Regulation gives examples of approval marks. |
| --- | --- |

4.9.

Annex 2 to this Regulation gives examples of approval marks.

5.   SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS

| 5.1. | The vehicle shall undergo a test in accordance with annex 4 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

The vehicle shall undergo a test in accordance with annex 4 to this Regulation.

| 5.1.1. | The test will be carried out on the driver's side unless asymmetric side structures, if any, are so different as to affect the performance in a side impact. In that case either of the alternatives in paragraph 5.1.1.1 or 5.1.1.2 may be used by agreement between the manufacturer and test authority. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.1.

The test will be carried out on the driver's side unless asymmetric side structures, if any, are so different as to affect the performance in a side impact. In that case either of the alternatives in paragraph 5.1.1.1 or 5.1.1.2 may be used by agreement between the manufacturer and test authority.

| 5.1.1.1. | The manufacturer will provide the authority responsible for approval with information regarding the compatibility of performances in comparison with the driver's side when the test is being carried out on that side. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.1.1.

The manufacturer will provide the authority responsible for approval with information regarding the compatibility of performances in comparison with the driver's side when the test is being carried out on that side.

| 5.1.1.2. | The approval authority, if concerned as to the construction of the vehicle, will decide to have the test performed on the side opposite the driver, this being considered the least favourable. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.1.2.

The approval authority, if concerned as to the construction of the vehicle, will decide to have the test performed on the side opposite the driver, this being considered the least favourable.

| 5.1.2. | The Technical Service, after consultation with the manufacturer, may require the test to be carried out with the seat in a position other than the one indicated in paragraph 5.5.1 of Annex 4. This position shall be indicated in the test report (2). |
| --- | --- |

5.1.2.

The Technical Service, after consultation with the manufacturer, may require the test to be carried out with the seat in a position other than the one indicated in paragraph 5.5.1 of Annex 4. This position shall be indicated in the test report (2

| 5.1.3. | The result of this test shall be considered satisfactory if the conditions set out in paragraphs 5.2 and 5.3 below are satisfied. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.3.

The result of this test shall be considered satisfactory if the conditions set out in paragraphs 5.2 and 5.3 below are satisfied.

5.2.   Performance criteria

| 5.2.1. | The performance criteria, as determined for the collision test in accordance with the appendix to annex 4 to this Regulation shall meet the following conditions: |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.

The performance criteria, as determined for the collision test in accordance with the appendix to annex 4 to this Regulation shall meet the following conditions:

| 5.2.1.1 | the head performance criterion (HPC) shall be less than or equal to 1 000; when there is no head contact, then the HPC shall not be measured or calculated but recorded as ‘No Head Contact.’ |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.1

the head performance criterion (HPC) shall be less than or equal to 1 000; when there is no head contact, then the HPC shall not be measured or calculated but recorded as ‘No Head Contact.’

| 5.2.1.2. | the thorax performance criteria shall be:






  (a) | Rib Deflection Criterion (RDC) less than or equal to 42 mm; |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.2.1.2.

the thorax performance criteria shall be:

(a)

Rib Deflection Criterion (RDC) less than or equal to 42 mm;

| (b) | Soft Tissue Criterion (VC) less or equal to 1,0 m/sec. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Soft Tissue Criterion (VC) less or equal to 1,0 m/sec.

For a transitional period of two years after the date specified in paragraph 10.2. of this Regulation the V * C value is not a pass/fail criterion for the approval testing, but this value has to be recorded in the test report and to be collected by the approval authorities. After this transitional period, the VC value of 1,0 m/sec shall apply as a pass/fail criterion unless the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation decide otherwise.

| 5.2.1.3. | the pelvis performance criterion shall be:
  Pubic Symphysis Peak Force (PSPF) less than or equal to 6 kN. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.3.

the pelvis performance criterion shall be:

Pubic Symphysis Peak Force (PSPF) less than or equal to 6 kN.

| 5.2.1.4. | the abdomen performance criterion shall be:
  Abdominal Peak Force (APF) less than or equal to 2,5 kN internal force (equivalent to external force of 4,5 kN). |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.4.

the abdomen performance criterion shall be:

Abdominal Peak Force (APF) less than or equal to 2,5 kN internal force (equivalent to external force of 4,5 kN).

5.3.   Particular requirements

| 5.3.1. | No door shall open during the test. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

No door shall open during the test.

| 5.3.2. | After the impact, it shall be possible without the use of tools to: |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.

After the impact, it shall be possible without the use of tools to:

| 5.3.2.1. | open a sufficient number of doors provided for normal entry and exit of passengers, and if necessary tilt the seat-backs or seats to allow evacuation of all occupants; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.1.

open a sufficient number of doors provided for normal entry and exit of passengers, and if necessary tilt the seat-backs or seats to allow evacuation of all occupants;

| 5.3.2.2. | release the dummy from the protective system; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.2.

release the dummy from the protective system;

| 5.3.2.3. | remove the dummy from the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.3.

remove the dummy from the vehicle;

| 5.3.3. | no interior device or component shall become detached in such a way as noticeably to increase the risk of injury from sharp projections or jagged edges; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.3.

no interior device or component shall become detached in such a way as noticeably to increase the risk of injury from sharp projections or jagged edges;

| 5.3.4. | ruptures, resulting from permanent deformation are acceptable, provided these do not increase the risk of injury; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.

ruptures, resulting from permanent deformation are acceptable, provided these do not increase the risk of injury;

| 5.3.5. | if there is continuous leakage of liquid from the fuel-feed installation after the collision, the rate of leakage shall not exceed 30 g/min; if the liquid from the fuel-feed system mixes with liquids from the other systems and the various liquids cannot easily be separated and identified, all the liquids collected shall be taken into account in evaluating the continuous leakage. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.5.

if there is continuous leakage of liquid from the fuel-feed installation after the collision, the rate of leakage shall not exceed 30 g/min; if the liquid from the fuel-feed system mixes with liquids from the other systems and the various liquids cannot easily be separated and identified, all the liquids collected shall be taken into account in evaluating the continuous leakage.

6.   MODIFICATION OF THE VEHICLE TYPE

| 6.1. | Any modification affecting the structure, the number and type of seats, the interior trim or fittings, or the position of the vehicle controls or of mechanical parts which might affect the energy-absorption capacity of the side of the vehicle, shall be brought to the notice of the administrative department granting approval. The department may then either: |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

Any modification affecting the structure, the number and type of seats, the interior trim or fittings, or the position of the vehicle controls or of mechanical parts which might affect the energy-absorption capacity of the side of the vehicle, shall be brought to the notice of the administrative department granting approval. The department may then either:

| 6.1.1. | consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle still complies with the requirements, or |
| --- | --- |

6.1.1.

consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle still complies with the requirements, or

| 6.1.2. | require a further test report from the technical service responsible for conducting the tests; |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.

require a further test report from the technical service responsible for conducting the tests;

| 6.1.2.1. | Any modification of the vehicle affecting the general form of the structure of the vehicle or any variation in the reference mass greater than 8 per cent which in the judgement of the authority would have a marked influence on the results of the test shall require a repetition of the test as described in annex 4. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.1.

Any modification of the vehicle affecting the general form of the structure of the vehicle or any variation in the reference mass greater than 8 per cent which in the judgement of the authority would have a marked influence on the results of the test shall require a repetition of the test as described in annex 4.

| 6.1.2.2. | If the technical service, after consultation with the vehicle manufacturer, considers that modifications to a vehicle type are insufficient to warrant a complete retest then a partial test may be used. This would be the case if the reference mass is not more than 8 per cent different from the original vehicle or the number of front seats is unchanged. Variations of seat type or interior fittings need not automatically entail a full retest. An example of the approach to this problem is given in annex 8. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.2.

If the technical service, after consultation with the vehicle manufacturer, considers that modifications to a vehicle type are insufficient to warrant a complete retest then a partial test may be used. This would be the case if the reference mass is not more than 8 per cent different from the original vehicle or the number of front seats is unchanged. Variations of seat type or interior fittings need not automatically entail a full retest. An example of the approach to this problem is given in annex 8.

| 6.2. | Confirmation or refusal of approval, specifying the alteration, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 4.4 above to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

Confirmation or refusal of approval, specifying the alteration, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 4.4 above to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation.

| 6.3. | The competent authority issuing an extension of approval shall assign a series number to each communication form drawn up for such an extension. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

The competent authority issuing an extension of approval shall assign a series number to each communication form drawn up for such an extension.

7.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 7.1. | Every vehicle approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set out in paragraph 5 above. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Every vehicle approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set out in paragraph 5 above.

| 7.2. | The holder of the approval shall ensure that for each type of vehicle at least the tests concerning the taking of measurements are carried out. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

The holder of the approval shall ensure that for each type of vehicle at least the tests concerning the taking of measurements are carried out.

| 7.3. | The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every two years. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.

The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every two years.

8.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 8.1. | The approval granted in respect of a vehicle type, pursuant to this Regulation, may be withdrawn if the requirement laid down in paragraph 7.1 above is not complied with, or if the vehicle or vehicles selected have failed to pass the checks prescribed in paragraph 7.2 above. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

The approval granted in respect of a vehicle type, pursuant to this Regulation, may be withdrawn if the requirement laid down in paragraph 7.1 above is not complied with, or if the vehicle or vehicles selected have failed to pass the checks prescribed in paragraph 7.2 above.

| 8.2. | If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in annex 1 to this Regulation.

9.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of vehicle approved in accordance with this Regulation, he shall so inform the authority which granted the approval. Upon receiving the relevant communication that authority shall inform thereof the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in annex 1 to this Regulation.

10.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

| 10.1. | As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approval under this Regulation as amended by Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approval under this Regulation as amended by Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments.

| 10.2. | As from 12 months after the entry into force of the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant ECE approvals only to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 02 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

As from 12 months after the entry into force of the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant ECE approvals only to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 02 series of amendments.

| 10.3. | As from 60 months after the entry into service of the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse first national registration (first entry into service) of vehicles which do not meet the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 02 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

10.3.

As from 60 months after the entry into service of the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse first national registration (first entry into service) of vehicles which do not meet the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 02 series of amendments.

| 10.4. | As from 36 months after the entry into force of Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant ECE approvals only to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation. as amended by Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

10.4.

As from 36 months after the entry into force of Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant ECE approvals only to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation. as amended by Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments.

| 10.5. | As from 84 months after the entry into force of Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse first national registration (first entry into service) of vehicles which do not meet the requirements of this regulation as amended by Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

10.5.

As from 84 months after the entry into force of Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse first national registration (first entry into service) of vehicles which do not meet the requirements of this regulation as amended by Supplement 1 to the 02 series of amendments.

11.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING APPROVAL TESTS, AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

The Contracting Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension, or refusal or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

---

(1)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Yugoslavia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35-36 (vacant), 37 for Turkey, 38-39 (vacant), 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia and 46 for Ukraine. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

1

(2)  Until 30 September 2000, for the purposes of the test requirements, the range of normal longitudinal adjustments shall be limited such that the H-point lies within the length of the door aperture.

2

---

ANNEX 1

(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

COMMUNICATION

Image 1

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval (see approval provisions in the Regulation).

(2) Strike out what does not apply.

concerning (2): APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a vehicle type with regard to protection of occupants in the event of a lateral collision pursuant to Regulation No 95

Approval No Extension No

1. Trade name or mark of the power-driven vehicle

2. Vehicle type

3. Manufacturer's name and address

4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's representative

5. Vehicle submitted for approval on

6. Side impact dummy utilized ES-1/ES-2 (2)

7. Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests

8. Date of test report.

9. Number of test report

10. Approval granted/refused/extended/withdrawn (2)

11. Position of approval mark on the vehicle

12. Place

13. Date

14. Signature

15. The list of documents deposited with the Administrative Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.

issued by: Name of administration:

---

ANNEX 2

ARRANGEMENTS OF THE APPROVAL MARK

Model A

(See paragraph 4.5 of this Regulation)

a = 8 mm min

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has, with regard to the protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision, been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulation No 95. The approval number indicates that the approval was granted in accordance with the requirements of Regulation No 95 as amended by the 01 series of amendments.

Model B

(See paragraph 4.6. of this Regulation)

a = 8 mm min

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulations Nos 95 and 24 (*1). (In the case of the latter Regulation, the additional symbol which follows the Regulation number indicates that the corrected absorption co-efficient is 1,30 m-1). The first two approval numbers indicate that at the date when the respective approvals were granted, Regulation No 95 incorporated the 01 series of amendments and Regulation No 24 incorporated the 03 series of amendments.

---

(*1)  The latter number is given only as an example.

---

ANNEX 3

PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES

1.   PURPOSE

The procedure described in this annex is used to establish the ‘H’ point location and the actual torso angle for one or several seating positions in a motor vehicle and to verify the relationship of measured data to design specifications given by the vehicle manufacturer (1).

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this annex:

| 2.1. | ‘Reference data’ means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position: |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.1.1. | the ‘H’ point and the ‘R’ point and their relationship, |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.

| 2.1.2. | the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.

| 2.2. | ‘Three-dimensional “H” point machine’ (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | ‘“H” point’ means the pivot centre of the torso and the thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The ‘H’ point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the ‘H’ point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The ‘H’ point corresponds theoretically to the ‘R’ point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the ‘H’ point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | ‘“R” point’ or ‘seating reference point’ means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system; |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | ‘Torso-line’ means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.6. | ‘Actual torso angle’ means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below): |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

| 2.7. | ‘Design torso angle’ means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

| 2.8. | ‘Centreplane of occupant’ (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

| 2.9. | ‘Three-dimensional reference system’ means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex; |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

| 2.10. | ‘Fiducial marks’ are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

| 2.11. | ‘Vehicle measuring attitude’ means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

3.   REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   Data presentation

For each seating position where reference data are required in order to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of the present Regulation, all or an appropriate selection of the following data shall be presented in the form indicated in Appendix 3 to this annex:

| 3.1.1. | the co-ordinates of the ‘R’ point relative to the three-dimensional reference system; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

| 3.1.2. | the design torso angle; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

| 3.1.3. | all indications necessary to adjust the seat (if it is adjustable) to the measuring position set out in paragraph 4.3 below. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

3.2.   Relationship between measured data and design specifications

| 3.2.1. | The co-ordinates of the ‘H’ point and the value of the actual torso angle obtained by the procedure set out in paragraph 4 below shall be compared, respectively, with the co-ordinates of the ‘R’ point and the value of the design torso angle indicated by the vehicle manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

| 3.2.2. | The relative positions of the ‘R’ point and the ‘H’ point and the relationship between the design torso angle and the actual torso angle shall be considered satisfactory for the seating position in question if the ‘H’ point, as defined by its co-ordinates, lies within a square of 50 mm side length with horizontal and vertical sides whose diagonals intersect at the ‘R’ point, and if the actual torso angle is within 5o of the design torso angle. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

| 3.2.3. | If these conditions are met, the ‘R’ point and the design torso angle, shall be used to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

| 3.2.4. | If the ‘H’ point or the actual torso angle does not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 above, the ‘H’ point and the actual torso angle shall be determined twice more (three times in all). If the results of two of these three operations satisfy the requirements, the conditions of paragraph 3.2.3 above shall apply. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

| 3.2.5. | If the results of at least two of the three operations described in paragraph 3.2.4. above do not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 above, or if the verification cannot take place because the vehicle manufacturer has failed to supply information regarding the position of the ‘R’ point or regarding the design torso angle, the centroid of the three measured points or the average of the three measured angles shall be used and be regarded as applicable in all cases where the ‘R’ point or the design torso angle is referred to in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

4.   PROCEDURE FOR ‘H’ POINT AND ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE DETERMINATION

| 4.1. | The vehicle shall be preconditioned at the manufacturer's discretion, at a temperature of 20 ± 10 oC to ensure that the seat material reached room temperature. If the seat to be checked has never been sat upon, a 70 to 80 kg person or device shall sit on the seat twice for one minute to flex the cushion and back. At the manufacturer's request, all seat assemblies shall remain unloaded for a minimum period of 30 min prior to installation of the 3-D H machine. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

| 4.2. | The vehicle shall be at the measuring attitude defined in paragraph 2.11 above. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

| 4.3. | The seat, if it is adjustable, shall be adjusted first to the rearmost normal driving or riding position, as indicated by the vehicle manufacturer, taking into consideration only the longitudinal adjustment of the seat, excluding seat travel used for purposes other than normal driving or riding positions. Where other modes of seat adjustment exist (vertical, angular, seat-back, etc.) these will then be adjusted to the position specified by the vehicle manufacturer. For suspension seats, the vertical position shall be rigidly fixed corresponding to a normal driving position as specified by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

| 4.4. | The area of the seating position contacted by the 3-D H machine shall be covered by a muslin cotton, of sufficient size and appropriate texture, described as a plain cotton fabric having 18,9 threads per cm2 and weighing 0,228 kg/m2 or knitted or non-woven fabric having equivalent characteristics. If the test is run on a seat outside the vehicle, the floor on which the seat is placed shall have the same essential characteristics (2) as the floor of the vehicle in which the seat is intended to be used. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

| 4.5. | Place the seat and back assembly of the 3-D H machine so that the centreplane of the occupant (C/LO) coincides with the centreplane of the 3-D H machine. At the manufacturer's request, the 3-D H machine may be moved inboard with respect to the C/LO if the 3-D H machine is located so far outboard that the seat edge will not permit levelling of the 3-D H machine. |
| --- | --- |

4.5.

| 4.6. | Attach the foot and lower leg assemblies to the seat pan assembly, either individually or by using the T-bar and lower leg assembly. A line through the ‘H’ point sight buttons shall be parallel to the ground and perpendicular to the longitudinal centreplane of the seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.6.

| 4.7. | Adjust the feet and leg positions of the 3-D H machine as follows: |
| --- | --- |

4.7.

4.7.1.   Designated seating position: driver and outside front passenger

| 4.7.1.1. | Both feet and leg assemblies shall be moved forward in such a way that the feet take up natural positions on the floor, between the operating pedals if necessary. Where possible the left foot shall be located approximately the same distance to the left of the centreplane of the 3-D H machine as the right foot is to the right. The spirit level verifying the transverse orientation of the 3-D H machine is brought to the horizontal by readjustment of the seat pan if necessary, or by adjusting the leg and foot assemblies towards the rear. The line passing through the ‘H’ point sight buttons shall be maintained perpendicular to the longitudinal centreplane of the seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.1.1.

| 4.7.1.2. | If the left leg cannot be kept parallel to the right leg and the left foot cannot be supported by the structure, move the left foot until it is supported. The alignment of the sight buttons shall be maintained. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.1.2.

4.7.2.   Designated seating position: outboard rear

For rear seats or auxiliary seats, the legs are located as specified by the manufacturer. If the feet then rest on parts of the floor which are at different levels, the foot which first comes into contact with the front seat shall serve as a reference and the other foot shall be so arranged that the spirit level giving the transverse orientation of the seat of the device indicates the horizontal.

| 4.7.3. | Other designated seating positions:
  The general procedure indicated in paragraph 4.7.1 above shall be followed except that the feet shall be placed as specified by the vehicle manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.3.

The general procedure indicated in paragraph 4.7.1 above shall be followed except that the feet shall be placed as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.

| 4.8. | Apply lower leg and thigh weights and level the 3-D H machine. |
| --- | --- |

4.8.

| 4.9. | Tilt the back pan forward against the forward stop and draw the 3-D H machine away from the seat-back using the T-bar. Reposition the 3-D H machine on the seat by one of the following methods: |
| --- | --- |

4.9.

| 4.9.1. | If the 3-D H machine tends to slide rearward, use the following procedure. Allow the 3-D H machine to slide rearward until a forward horizontal restraining load on the T-bar is no longer required i.e. until the seat pan contacts the seat-back. If necessary, reposition the lower leg. |
| --- | --- |

4.9.1.

| 4.9.2. | If the 3-D H machine does not tend to slide rearward, use the following procedure. Slide the 3-D H machine rearwards by applying a horizontal rearward load to the T-bar until the seat pan contacts the seat-back (see Figure 2 of Appendix 1 to this Annex). |
| --- | --- |

4.9.2.

| 4.10. | Apply a 100 ± 10 N load to the back and pan assembly of the 3-D H machine at the intersection of the hip angle quadrant and the T-bar housing. The direction of load application shall be maintained along a line passing by the above intersection to a point just above the thigh bar housing (see figure 2 of appendix 1 to this annex). Then carefully return the back pan to the seat-back. Care must be exercised throughout the remainder of the procedure to prevent the 3-D H machine from sliding forward. |
| --- | --- |

4.10.

| 4.11. | Install the right and left buttock weights and then, alternately, the eight torso weights.
  Maintain the 3-D H machine level. |
| --- | --- |

4.11.

Maintain the 3-D H machine level.

| 4.12. | Tilt the back pan forward to release the tension on the seat-back. Rock the 3-D H machine from side to side through a 10o arc (5o to each side of the vertical centreplane) for three complete cycles to release any accumulated friction between the 3-D H machine and the seat.
  During the rocking action, the T-bar of the 3-D H machine may tend to diverge from the specified horizontal and vertical alignment. The T-bar must therefore be restrained by applying an appropriate lateral load during the rocking motions. Care shall be exercised in holding the T-bar and rocking the 3-D H machine to ensure that no inadvertent exterior loads are applied in a vertical or fore and aft direction.
  The feet of the 3-D H machine are not to be restrained or held during this step. If the feet change position, they should be allowed to remain in that attitude for the moment.
  Carefully return the back pan to the seat-back and check the two spirits levels for zero position. If any movement of the feet has occurred during the rocking operation of the 3-D H machine, they must be repositioned as follows: | Alternately, lift each foot off the floor the minimum necessary amount until no additional foot movement is obtained. During this lifting, the feet are to be free to rotate; and no forward or lateral loads are to be applied. When each foot is placed back in the down position, the heel is to be in contact with the structure designed for this. |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.12.

During the rocking action, the T-bar of the 3-D H machine may tend to diverge from the specified horizontal and vertical alignment. The T-bar must therefore be restrained by applying an appropriate lateral load during the rocking motions. Care shall be exercised in holding the T-bar and rocking the 3-D H machine to ensure that no inadvertent exterior loads are applied in a vertical or fore and aft direction.

The feet of the 3-D H machine are not to be restrained or held during this step. If the feet change position, they should be allowed to remain in that attitude for the moment.

Carefully return the back pan to the seat-back and check the two spirits levels for zero position. If any movement of the feet has occurred during the rocking operation of the 3-D H machine, they must be repositioned as follows:

Alternately, lift each foot off the floor the minimum necessary amount until no additional foot movement is obtained. During this lifting, the feet are to be free to rotate; and no forward or lateral loads are to be applied. When each foot is placed back in the down position, the heel is to be in contact with the structure designed for this.

| | Check the lateral spirit level for zero position; if necessary, apply a lateral load to the top of the back pan sufficient to level the 3-D H machine's seat pan on the seat. |
| --- | --- |

Check the lateral spirit level for zero position; if necessary, apply a lateral load to the top of the back pan sufficient to level the 3-D H machine's seat pan on the seat.

| 4.13. | Holding the T-bar to prevent the 3-D H machine from sliding forward on the seat cushion, proceed as follows:






  (a) | return the back pan to the seat-back; |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.13.

(a)

return the back pan to the seat-back;

| (b) | alternately apply and release a horizontal rearward load, not to exceed 25 N, to the back angle bar at a height approximately at the centre of the torso weights until the hip angle quadrant indicates that a stable position has been reached after load release. Care shall be exercised to ensure that no exterior downward or lateral loads are applied to the 3-D H machine. If another level adjustment of the 3-D H machine is necessary, rotate the back pan forward, re-level, and repeat the procedure from paragraph 4.12. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

alternately apply and release a horizontal rearward load, not to exceed 25 N, to the back angle bar at a height approximately at the centre of the torso weights until the hip angle quadrant indicates that a stable position has been reached after load release. Care shall be exercised to ensure that no exterior downward or lateral loads are applied to the 3-D H machine. If another level adjustment of the 3-D H machine is necessary, rotate the back pan forward, re-level, and repeat the procedure from paragraph 4.12.

| 4.14. | Take all measurements: |
| --- | --- |

4.14.

| 4.14.1. | The co-ordinates of the ‘H’ point are measured with respect to the three-dimensional reference system. |
| --- | --- |

4.14.1.

| 4.14.2. | The actual torso angle is read at the back angle quadrant of the 3-D H machine with the probe in its fully rearward position. |
| --- | --- |

4.14.2.

| 4.15. | If a re-run of the installation of the 3-D H machine is desired, the seat assembly should remain unloaded for a minimum period of 30 min prior to the re-run. The 3-D H machine should not be left loaded on the seat assembly longer than the time required to perform the test. |
| --- | --- |

4.15.

| 4.16. | If the seats in the same row can be regarded as similar (bench seat, identical seats, etc.) only one ‘H’ point and one ‘actual torso angle’ shall be determined for each row of seats, the 3-D H machine described in Appendix 1 to this annex being seated in a place regarded as representative for the row. This place shall be: |
| --- | --- |

4.16.

| 4.16.1. | in the case of the front row, the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- |

4.16.1.

| 4.16.2. | in the case of the rear row or rows, an outer seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.16.2.

---

(1)  In any seating position other than front seats where the ‘H’ point cannot be determined using the ‘Three-dimensional “H” point machine’ or procedures, the ‘R’ point indicated by the manufacturer may be taken as a reference at the discretion of the competent authority.

(2)  Tilt angle, height difference with a seat mounting, surface texture, etc.

Appendix 1

DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE DIMENSIONAL ‘H’ POINT MACHINE (*1)

(3-D H machine)

1.   BACK AND SEAT PANS

The back and seat pans are constructed of reinforced plastic and metal; they simulate the human torso and thigh and are mechanically hinged at the ‘H’ point. A quadrant is fastened to the probe hinged at the ‘H’ point to measure the actual torso angle. An adjustable thigh bar, attached to the seat pan, establishes the thigh centreline and serves as a baseline for the hip angle quadrant.

2.   BODY AND LEG ELEMENTS

Lower leg segments are connected to the seat pan assembly at the T-bar joining the knees, which is a lateral extension of the adjustable thigh bar. Quadrants are incorporated in the lower leg segments to measure knee angles. Shoe and foot assemblies are calibrated to measure the foot angle. Two spirit levels orient the device in space. Body element weights are placed at the corresponding centres of gravity to provide seat penetration equivalent to a 76 kg male. All joints of the 3-D H machine should be checked for free movement without encountering noticeable friction.

Figure 1

3-D H machine elements designation

Head room probe

Back pan

Back angle quadrant

H-point sight button

H-point pivot

Lateral level

Thigh bar

Knee angle quadrant

Foot angle quadrant

Torso weight hanger

Back angle level

Hip angle quadrant

Seat pan

Thigh weight pad

T-bar joining the knees

Figure 2

Dimensions of the 3-D H machine elements and load distribution

Variable from 108 to 424

Leg weight

Direction and point of application of load

Thigh weight

Buttock weight

Torso weight

---

(*1)  For details of the construction of the 3-D H machine refer to Society of Automobile Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15096, United States of America.

The machine corresponds to that described in ISO Standard 6549-1980.

Appendix 2

THREE-DIMENSIONAL REFERENCE SYSTEM

1.

The three-dimensional reference system is defined by three orthogonal planes established by the vehicle manufacturer (see figure). (*1)

2.

The vehicle measuring attitude is established by positioning the vehicle on the supporting surface such that the co-ordinates of the fiducial marks correspond to the values indicated by the manufacturer.

3.

The co-ordinates of the ‘R’ point and the ‘H’ point are established in relation to the fiducial marks defined by the vehicle manufacturer.

Figure

Three-dimensional reference system

Zero Y plane (vertical longitudinal zero plane)

Zero X plane (vertical transverse zero plane)

Zero Z plane (horizontal zero plane)

Supporting surface

---

(*1)  The reference system corresponds to ISO standard 4130:1978.

*1

Appendix 3

REFERENCE DATA CONCERNING SEATING POSITIONS

1.   CODING OF REFERENCE DATA

Reference data are listed consecutively for each seating position. Seating positions are identified by a two-digit code. The first digit is an Arabic numeral and designates the row of seats, counting from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The second digit is a capital letter which designates the location of the seating position in a row, as viewed in the direction of forward motion of the vehicle; the following letters shall be used:

| L | = | left |
| --- | --- | --- |
| C | = | centre |
| R | = | right |

L

=

left

C

=

centre

R

=

right

2.   DESCRIPTION OF VEHICLE MEASURING ATTITUDE

| 2.1. | Co-ordinates of fiducial marks
  X ..............................
  Y ..............................
  Z .............................. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

X ..............................

Y ..............................

Z ..............................

3.   LIST OF REFERENCE DATA

| 3.1. | Seating position: .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.1.1. | Co-ordinates of ‘R’ point
  X ..............................
  Y ..............................
  Z .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

X ..............................

Y ..............................

Z ..............................

| 3.1.2. | Design torso angle: .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

| 3.1.3. | Specifications for seat adjustment (*1)

  horizontal: ..............................
  vertical: ..............................
  angular: ..............................
  torso angle: .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

horizontal: ..............................

vertical: ..............................

angular: ..............................

torso angle: ..............................

Note: List reference data for further seating positions under 3.2, 3.3, etc.

---

(*1)  Strike out what does not apply.

---

ANNEX 4

COLLISION TEST PROCEDURE

1.   INSTALLATIONS

1.1.   Testing ground

The test area shall be large enough to accommodate the mobile deformable barrier propulsion system and to permit after-impact displacement of the vehicle impacted and installation of the test equipment. The part in which vehicle impact and displacement occur shall be horizontal, flat and uncontaminated, and representative of a normal, dry, uncontaminated road surface.

2.   TEST CONDITIONS

| 2.1. | The vehicle to be tested shall be stationary. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | The mobile deformable barrier shall have the characteristics set out in annex 5 to this Regulation. Requirements for the examination are given in the appendix to annex 5. The mobile deformable barrier shall be equipped with a suitable device to prevent a second impact on the struck vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | The trajectory of the mobile deformable barrier longitudinal median vertical plane shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal median vertical plane of the impacted vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | The longitudinal vertical median plane of the mobile deformable barrier shall be coincident within ± 25 mm with a transverse vertical plane passing through the R point of the front seat adjacent to the struck side of the tested vehicle. The horizontal median plane limited by the external lateral vertical planes of the front face shall be at the moment of impact within two planes determined before the test and situated 25 mm above and below the previously defined plane. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | Instrumentation shall comply with ISO 6487:1987 unless otherwise specified in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.6. | The stabilized temperature of the test dummy at the time of the side impact test shall be 22 ± 4 oC. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

3.   TEST SPEED

The mobile deformable barrier speed at the moment of impact shall be 50 ± 1 km/h. This speed shall be stabilized at least 0,5 m before impact. Accuracy of measurement: 1 per cent. However, if the test was performed at a higher impact speed and the vehicle met the requirements, the test shall be considered satisfactory.

4.   STATE OF THE VEHICLE

4.1.   General specification

The test vehicle shall be representative of the series production, shall include all the equipment normally fitted and shall be in normal running order. Some components may be omitted or replaced by equivalent masses where this omission or substitution clearly has no effect on the results of the test.

4.2.   Vehicle equipment specification

The test vehicle shall have all the optional arrangements or fittings likely to influence the results of the test.

4.3.   Mass of the vehicle

| 4.3.1. | The vehicle to be tested shall have the reference mass as defined in paragraph 2.10. of this Regulation. The mass of the vehicle shall be adjusted to ± 1 per cent of the reference mass. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.1.

| 4.3.2. | The fuel tank shall be filled with water to a mass equal to 90 per cent of the mass of a full load of fuel as specified by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.2.

| 4.3.3. | All the other systems (brake, cooling, etc.) may be empty; in this case, the mass of the liquids shall be offset. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.3.

| 4.3.4. | If the mass of the measuring apparatus on board of the vehicle exceeds the 25 kg allowed, it may be offset by reductions which have no noticeable effect on the results of the test. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.4.

| 4.3.5. | The mass of the measuring apparatus shall not change each axle reference load by more than 5 per cent, each variation not exceeding 20 kg. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.5.

5.   PREPARATION OF THE VEHICLE

| 5.1. | The side windows at least on the struck side shall be closed. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

| 5.2. | The doors shall be closed, but not locked. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

| 5.3. | The transmission shall be placed in neutral and the parking brake disengaged. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

| 5.4. | The comfort adjustments of the seats, if any, shall be adjusted to the position specified by the vehicle manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

| 5.5. | The seat containing the dummy, and its elements, if adjustable, shall be adjusted as follows: |
| --- | --- |

5.5.

| 5.5.1. | The longitudinal adjustment device shall be placed with the locking device engaged in the position that is nearest to midway between the foremost and rearmost positions; if this position is between two notches, the rearmost notch shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.1.

| 5.5.2. | The head restraint shall be adjusted such that its top surface is level with the centre of gravity of the dummy's head; if this is not possible, the head restraint shall be in the uppermost position. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.2.

| 5.5.3. | Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, the seat-back shall be set such that the torso reference line of the three-dimensional H point machine is set at an angle of 25 ± 1o towards the rear. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.

| 5.5.4. | All other seat adjustments shall be at the mid-point of available travel; however, height adjustment shall be at the position corresponding to the fixed seat, if the vehicle type is available with adjustable and fixed seats. If locking positions are not available at the respective mid-points of travel, the positions immediately rearward, down, or outboard of the mid-points shall be used. For rotational adjustments (tilt), rearward will be the adjustment direction which moves the head of the dummy rearwards. If the dummy protrudes outside the normal passenger volume, e.g. head into roof lining, then 1 cm clearance will be provided using: secondary adjustments, seat-back angle, or fore-aft adjustment in that order. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.4.

| 5.6. | Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, the other front seats shall, if possible, be adjusted to the same position as the seat containing the dummy. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.

| 5.7. | If the steering wheel is adjustable, all adjustments are positioned to their mid-travel locations. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.

| 5.8. | Tyres shall be inflated to the pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.

| 5.9. | The test vehicle shall be set horizontal about its roll axis and maintained by supports in that position until the side impact dummy is in place and after all preparatory work is complete. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.

| 5.10. | The vehicle shall be at its normal attitude corresponding to the conditions set out in paragraph 4.3 above. Vehicles with suspension enabling their ground clearance to be adjusted shall be tested under the normal conditions of use at 50 km/h as defined by the vehicle manufacturer. This shall be assured by means of additional supports, if necessary, but such supports shall have no influence on the crash behaviour of the test vehicle during the impact. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.

6.   SIDE IMPACT DUMMY AND ITS INSTALLATION

| 6.1. | The side impact dummy shall comply with the specifications given in annex 6 and be installed in the front seat on the impact side according to the procedure given in annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

| 6.2. | The safety-belts or other restraint systems, which are specified for the vehicle, shall be used. Belts should be of an approved type, conforming to Regulation No 16 or to other equivalent requirements and mounted on anchorages conforming to Regulation No 14 or to other equivalent requirements. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

| 6.3. | The safety-belt or restraint system shall be adjusted to fit the dummy in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; if there are no manufacturer's instructions, the height adjustment shall be set at middle position; if this position is not available, the position immediately below shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

7.   MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE ON THE SIDE IMPACT DUMMY

| 7.1. | The readings of the following measuring devices are to be recorded. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

7.1.1.   Measurements in the head of the dummy

The resultant triaxial acceleration referring to the head centre of gravity. The head channel instrumentation shall comply with ISO 6487:1987 with:

CFC: 1 000 Hz, and

CAC: 150 g

7.1.2.   Measurements in the thorax of the dummy

The three thorax rib deflection channels shall comply with ISO 6487:1987

CFC: 1 000 Hz

CAC: 60 mm

7.1.3.   Measurements in the pelvis of the dummy

The pelvis force channel shall comply with ISO 6487:1987

CFC: 1 000 Hz

CAC: 15 kN

7.1.4.   Measurements in the abdomen of the dummy

The abdomen force channels shall comply with ISO 6487:1987

CFC: 1 000 Hz

CAC: 5 kN

Appendix 1

DETERMINATION OF PERFORMANCE DATA

The required results of the tests are specified in paragraph 5.2 of this Regulation.

1.   HEAD PERFORMANCE CRITERION (HPC)

When head contact takes place, this performance criterion is calculated for the total duration between the initial contact and the last instant of the final contact.

HPC is the maximum value of the expression:

Formula

where a is the resultant acceleration at the centre of gravity of the head in metres per second per second divided by 9,81 recorded versus time and filtered at channel frequency class 1 000 Hz; t1 and t2 are any two times between the initial contact and the last instant of the final contact.

2.   THORAX PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

| 2.1. | Chest deflection: the peak chest deflection is the maximum value of deflection on any rib as determined by the thorax displacement transducers, filtered at channel frequency class 180 Hz. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | Viscous criterion: the peak viscous response is the maximum value of VC on any rib which is calculated from the instantaneous product of the relative thorax compression related to the half thorax and the velocity of compression derived by differentiation of the compression, filtered at channel frequency class 180 Hz. For the purposes of this calculation the standard width of the half thorax rib cage is 140 mm.





  where D (metres) = rib deflection
  The calculation algorithm to be used is set out in Annex 4, Appendix 2. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

Formula

where D (metres) = rib deflection

The calculation algorithm to be used is set out in Annex 4, Appendix 2.

3.   ABDOMEN PROTECTION CRITERION

The peak abdominal force is the maximum value of the sum of the three forces measured by transducers mounted 39 mm below the surface on the crash side, CFC 600 Hz.

4.   PELVIS PERFORMANCE CRITERION

The pubic symphisis peak force (PSPF) is the maximum force measured by a load cell at the pubic symphysis of the pelvis, filtered at channel frequency class 600 Hz.

Appendix 2

THE PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATING THE VISCOUS CRITERION FOR EUROSID 1

The Viscous Criterion, VC, is calculated as the instantaneous product of the compression and the rate of deflection of the rib. Both are derived from the measurement of rib deflection. The rib deflection response is filtered once at Channel Frequency Class 180. The compression at time (t) is calculated as the deflection from this filtered signal expressed as the proportion of the half width of the EUROSID 1 chest, measured at the metal ribs (0,14 metres):

Formula

The rib deflection velocity at time (t) is calculated from the filtered deflection as:

Formula

where D(t) is the deflection at time (t) in metres and ∂t is the time interval in seconds between the measurements of deflection. The maximum value of ∂t shall be 1,25 × 10-4 seconds.

This calculation procedure is shown diagrammatically below:

Measured Deflection D(t)

Filter at CFC 180

Calculated Deflection Velocity: V(t)

Calculate Compression C(t)

Calculate Viscous Criterion at time (t) (VC)(t) = V(t) · C(t)

Determine the Maximum value of VC (VC)max = max [(VC)(t)]

---

ANNEX 5

MOBILE DEFORMABLE BARRIER CHARACTERISTICS

1.   CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MOBILE DEFORMABLE BARRIER

| 1.1. | The mobile deformable barrier (MDB) includes both an impactor and a trolley. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

| 1.2. | The total mass shall be 950 ± 20 kg. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

| 1.3. | The centre of gravity shall be situated in the longitudinal median vertical plane within 10 mm, 1 000 ± 30 mm behind the front axle and 500 ± 30 mm above the ground. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

| 1.4. | The distance between the front face of the impactor and the centre of gravity of the barrier shall be 2 000 ± 30 mm. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

| 1.5. | The ground clearance of the impactor shall be 300 ± 5 mm measured in static conditions from the lower edge of the lower front plate, before the impact. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

| 1.6. | The front and rear track width of the trolley shall be 1 500 ± 10 mm. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.

| 1.7. | The wheelbase of the trolley shall be 3 000 ± 10 mm. |
| --- | --- |

1.7.

2.   CHARACTERISTICS OF THE IMPACTOR

The impactor consists of six single blocks of aluminium honeycomb, which have been processed in order to give a progressively increasing level of force with increasing deflection (see paragraph 2.1). Front and rear aluminium plates are attached to the aluminium honeycomb blocks.

2.1.   Honeycomb blocks

2.1.1.   Geometrical characteristics

| 2.1.1.1. | The impactor consists of 6 joined zones whose forms and positioning are shown in Figures 1 and 2. The zones are defined as 500 ± 5 mm × 250 ± 3 mm in figures 1 and 2. The 500 mm should be in the W direction and the 250 mm in the L direction of the aluminium honeycomb construction (see Figure 3). |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.1.

| 2.1.1.2. | The impactor is divided into 2 rows. The lower row shall be 250 ± 3 mm high, and 500 ± 2 mm deep after pre-crush (see paragraph 2.1.2), and deeper than the upper row by 60 ± 2 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

| 2.1.1.3. | The blocks must be centred on the six zones defined in figure 1 and each block (including incomplete cells) should cover completely the area defined for each zone). |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.3.

2.1.2.   Pre-crush

| 2.1.2.1. | The pre-crush shall be performed on the surface of the honeycomb to which the front sheets are attached. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.1.

| 2.1.2.2. | Blocks 1, 2 and 3 should be crushed by 10 ± 2 mm on the top surface prior to testing to give a depth of 500 ± 2 mm (Figure 2). |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.2.

| 2.1.2.3. | Blocks 4, 5 and 6 should be crushed by 10 ± 2 mm on the top surface prior to testing to give a depth of 440 ± 2 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.3.

2.1.3.   Material characteristics

| 2.1.3.1. | The cell dimensions shall be 19 mm ± 10 per cent for each block (see Figure 4). |
| --- | --- |

2.1.3.1.

| 2.1.3.2. | The cells must be made of 3003 aluminium for the upper row. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.3.2.

| 2.1.3.3. | The cells must be made of 5052 aluminium for the lower row. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.3.3.

| 2.1.3.4. | The aluminium honeycomb blocks should be processed such that the force deflection-curve when statically crushed (according to the procedure defined in paragraph 2.1.4.) is within the corridors defined for each of the six blocks in appendix 1 to this annex. Moreover, the processed honeycomb material used in the honeycomb blocks to be used for constructing the barrier, should be cleaned in order to remove any residue that may have been produced during the processing of the raw honeycomb material. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.3.4.

| 2.1.3.5. | The mass of the blocks in each batch shall not differ by more than 5 per cent of the mean block mass for that batch. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.3.5.

2.1.4.   Static tests

| 2.1.4.1. | A sample taken from each batch of processed honeycomb core shall be tested according to the static test procedure described in paragraph 5. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.4.1.

| 2.1.4.2. | The force-compression for each block tested shall lie within the force deflection corridors defined in Appendix 1. Static force-deflection corridors are defined for each block of the barrier. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.4.2.

2.1.5.   Dynamic test

| 2.1.5.1. | The dynamic deformation characteristics, when impacted according to the protocol described in paragraph 6. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.1.

| 2.1.5.2. | Deviation from the limits of the force-deflection corridors characterising the rigidity of the impactor — as defined in Appendix 2 — may be allowed provided that: |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.2.

| 2.1.5.2.1. | the deviation occurs after the beginning of the impact and before the deformation of the impactor is equal to 150 mm; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.2.1.

| 2.1.5.2.2. | the deviation does not exceed 50 per cent of the nearest instantaneous prescribed limit of the corridor; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.2.2.

| 2.1.5.2.3. | each deflection corresponding to each deviation does not exceed 35 mm of deflection, and the sum of these deflections does not exceed 70 mm (see Appendix 2 to this annex); |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.2.3.

| 2.1.5.2.4. | the sum of energy derived from deviating outside the corridor does not exceed 5 per cent of the gross energy for that block. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.2.4.

| 2.1.5.3. | Blocks 1 and 3 are identical. Their rigidity is such that their force deflection curves fall between corridors of Figure 2a. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.3.

| 2.1.5.4. | Blocks 5 and 6 are identical. Their rigidity is such that their force deflection curves fall between corridors of Figure 2d. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.4.

| 2.1.5.5 | The rigidity of block 2 is such that its force deflection curves fall between corridors of Figure 2b. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.5

| 2.1.5.6. | The rigidity of block 4 is such that its force deflection curves fall between corridors of Figure 2c. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.6.

| 2.1.5.7. | The force-deflection of the impactor as a whole shall fall between corridors of figure 2e. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.7.

| 2.1.5.8. | The force-deflection curves shall be verified by a test detailed in annex 5, paragraph 6, consisting of an impact of the barrier against a dynamometric wall at 35 ± 0,5 km/h. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.8.

| 2.1.5.9. | The dissipated energy (1) against blocks 1 and 3 during the test shall be equal to 9,5 ± 2 kJ for these blocks. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.9.

| 2.1.5.10. | The dissipated energy against blocks 5 and 6 during the test shall be equal to 3,5 ± 1 kJ for these blocks. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.10.

| 2.1.5.11. | The dissipated energy against block 4 shall be equal to 4 ± 1 kJ. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.11.

| 2.1.5.12. | The dissipated energy against block 2 shall be equal to 15 ± 2 kJ. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.12.

| 2.1.5.13. | The dissipated total energy during the impact shall be equal to 45 ± 3 kJ. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.13.

| 2.1.5.14. | The maximum impactor deformation from the point of first contact, calculated from integration of the accelerometers according to paragraph 6.6.3., shall be equal to 330 ± 20 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.14.

| 2.1.5.15. | The final residual static impactor deformation measured after the dynamic test at level B (figure 2) shall be equal to 310 ± 20 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.5.15.

2.2.   Front plates

2.2.1.   Geometrical characteristics

| 2.2.1.1. | The front plates are 1 500 ± 1 mm wide and 250 ± 1 mm high. The thickness is 0,5±0,06 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.1.

| 2.2.1.2. | When assembled the overall dimensions of the impactor (defined in figure 2) shall be: 1 500±2,5 mm wide and 500 ±2,5 mm high. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.2.

| 2.2.1.3. | The upper edge of the lower front plate and the lower edge of the upper front plate should be aligned within 4 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.3.

2.2.2.   Material characteristics

| 2.2.2.1. | The front plates are manufactured from aluminium of series AlMg2 to AlMg3 with elongation ≥ 12 per cent, and a UTS ≥ 175 N/mm2. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.1.

2.3.   Back plate

2.3.1.   Geometric characteristics

| 2.3.1.1. | The geometric characteristics shall be according to figures 5 and 6. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1.1.

2.3.2.   Material characteristics

| 2.3.2.1. | The back plate shall consist of a 3 mm aluminium sheet. The back plate shall be manufactured from aluminium of series AlMg2 to AlMg3 with a hardness between 50 and 65 HBS. This plate shall be perforated with holes for ventilation: the location, the diameter and pitch are shown in figures 5 and 7. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2.1.

2.4.   Location of the honeycomb blocks

| 2.4.1. | The honeycomb blocks shall be centred on the perforated zone of the back plate (Figure 5). |
| --- | --- |

2.4.1.

2.5.   Bonding

| 2.5.1. | For both the front and the back plates, a maximum of 0,5 kg/m2 shall be applied evenly directly over the surface of the front plate, giving a maximum film thickness of 0,5 mm. The adhesive to be used throughout should be a two-part polyurethane {such as Ciba Geigy XB5090/1 resin with XB5304 hardener} or equivalent. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.1.

| 2.5.2. | For the back plate the minimum bonding strength shall be 0,6 MPa, (87 psi), tested according to paragraph 2.4.3. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.2.

| 2.5.3. | Bonding strength tests: |
| --- | --- |

2.5.3.

| 2.5.3.1. | Flatwise tensile testing is used to measure bond strength of adhesives according to ASTM C297-61. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.3.1.

| 2.5.3.2. | The test piece should be 100 mm × 100 mm, and 15 mm deep, bonded to a sample of the ventilated back plate material. The honeycomb used should be representative of that in the impactor, i.e. chemically etched to an equivalent degree as that near to the back plate in the barrier but without pre-crushing. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.3.2.

2.6.   Traceability

| 2.6.1. | Impactors shall carry consecutive serial numbers which are stamped, etched or otherwise permanently attached, from which the batches for the individual blocks and the date of manufacture can be established |
| --- | --- |

2.6.1.

2.7.   Impactor attachment

| 2.7.1. | The fitting on the trolley must be according to figure 8. The fitting will use six M8 bolts, and nothing shall be larger than the dimensions of the barrier in front of the wheels of the trolley. Appropriate spacers must be used between the lower back plate flange and the trolley face to avoid bowing of the back plate when the attachment bolts are tightened. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.

3.   VENTILATION SYSTEM

| 3.1. | The interface between the trolley and the ventilation system should be solid, rigid and flat. The ventilation device is part of the trolley and not of the impactor as supplied by the manufacturer. Geometrical characteristics of the ventilation device shall be according to figure 9. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.2. | Ventilation device mounting procedure. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

| 3.2.1. | Mount the ventilation device to the front plate of the trolley; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

| 3.2.2. | Ensure that a 0,5 mm thick gauge cannot be inserted between the ventilation device and the trolley face at any point. If there is a gap greater than 0,5 mm, the ventilation frame will need to be replaced or adjusted to fit without a gap of > 0,5 mm. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

| 3.2.3. | Dismount the ventilation device from the front of the trolley; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

| 3.2.4. | Fix a 1,0 mm thick layer of cork to the front face of the trolley; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

| 3.2.5. | Re-mount the ventilation device to the front of the trolley and tighten to exclude air gaps. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

4.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 4.1. | The manufacturer shall be responsible for the conformity of production procedures and for that purpose must in particular: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

| 4.1.1. | Ensure the existence of effective procedures so that the quality of the products can be inspected, |
| --- | --- |

4.1.1.

| 4.1.2. | Have access to the testing equipment needed to inspect the conformity of each product, |
| --- | --- |

4.1.2.

| 4.1.3. | Ensure that the test results are recorded and that the documents remain available for a time period of 10 years after the tests, |
| --- | --- |

4.1.3.

| 4.1.4. | Demonstrate that the samples tested are a reliable measure of the performance of the batch (examples of sampling methods according to batch production are given below). |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.

| 4.1.5. | Analyse results of tests in order to verify and ensure the stability of the barrier characteristics, making allowance for variations of an industrial production, such as temperature, raw materials quality, time of immersion in chemical, chemical concentration, neutralisation etc, and the control of the processed material in order to remove any residue from the processing, |
| --- | --- |

4.1.5.

| 4.1.6. | Ensure that any set of samples or test pieces giving evidence of non-conformity gives rise to a further sampling and test. All the necessary steps must be taken to restore conformity of the corresponding production. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.6.

| 4.2. | The manufacturer's level of certification must be at least ISO 9002 standard. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

| 4.3. | Minimum conditions for the control of production: the holder of an agreement will ensure the control of conformity following the methods hereunder described. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

4.4.   Examples of sampling according to batch

| 4.4.1. | If several examples of one block type are constructed from one original block of aluminium honeycomb and are all treated in the same treatment bath (parallel production), one of these examples could be chosen as the sample, provided care is taken to ensure that the treatment is evenly applied to all blocks. If not, it may be necessary to select more than one sample. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.1.

| 4.4.2. | If a limited number of similar blocks (say three to twenty) are treated in the same bath (serial production), then the first and last block treated in a batch, all of which are constructed from the same original block of aluminium honeycomb, should be taken as representative samples. If the first sample complies with the requirements but the last does not, it may be necessary to take further samples from earlier in the production until a sample that does comply is found. Only the blocks between these samples should be considered to be approved. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.2.

| 4.4.3. | Once experience is gained with the consistency of production control, it may be possible to combine both sampling approaches, so that more than one groups of parallel production can be considered to be a batch provided samples from the first and last production groups comply. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.3.

5.   STATIC TESTS

| 5.1. | One or more samples (according to the batch method) taken from each batch of processed honeycomb core shall be tested, according to the following test procedure: |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

| 5.2. | The sample size of the aluminium honeycomb for static tests shall be the size of a normal block of the impactor, that is to say 250 mm × 500 mm × 440 mm for top row and 250 mm × 500 mm × 500 mm for the bottom row. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

| 5.3. | The samples should be compressed between two parallel loading plates which are at least 20 mm larger that the block cross section. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

| 5.4. | The compression speed shall be 100 millimetres per minute, with a tolerance of 5 per cent. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

| 5.5. | The data acquisition for static compression shall be sampled at a minimum of 5 Hz. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.

| 5.6. | The static test shall be continued until the block compression is at least 300 mm for blocks 4 to 6 and 350 mm for blocks 1 to 3. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.

6.   DYNAMIC TESTS

For every 100 barrier faces produced, the manufacturer shall make one dynamic test against a dynamometric wall supported by a fixed rigid barrier, according to the method described below.

6.1.   Installation

6.1.1.   Testing ground

| 6.1.1.1. | The test area shall be large enough to accommodate the run-up-track of the mobile deformable barrier, the rigid barrier and the technical equipment necessary for the test. The last part of the track, for at least 5 metres before the rigid barrier, shall be horizontal, flat and smooth. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.1.1.

6.1.2.   Fixed rigid barrier and dynamometric wall

| 6.1.2.1. | The rigid wall shall consist of a block of reinforced concrete not less than 3 metres wide and not less than 1,5 metres high. The thickness of the rigid wall shall be such that it weighs at least 70 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.1.

| 6.1.2.2. | The front face shall be vertical, perpendicular to the axis of the run-up-tack and equipped with six load cell plates, each capable of measuring the total load on the appropriate block of the mobile deformable barrier impactor at the moment of impact. The load cell impact plate area centres shall align with those of the six impact zones of the mobile deformable barrier face. Their edges shall clear adjacent areas by 20 mm such that, within the tolerance of impact alignment of the MDB, the impact zones will not contact the adjacent impact plate areas. Cell mounting and plate surfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements set out in the annex to standard ISO 6487:1987. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.2.

| 6.1.2.3. | Surface protection, comprising a plywood face (thickness: 12 ± 1 mm), is added to each load cell plate such that it shall not degrade the transducer responses. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.3.

| 6.1.2.4. | The rigid wall shall be either anchored in the ground or placed on the ground with, if necessary, additional arresting devices to limit its deflection. A rigid wall (to which the load cells are attached) having different characteristics but giving results that are at least equally conclusive may be used. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.4.

6.2.   Propulsion of the mobile deformable barrier

At the moment of impact the mobile deformable barrier shall no longer be subject to the action of any additional steering or propelling device. It shall reach the obstacle on a course perpendicular to the front surface of the dynamometric wall. Impact alignment shall be accurate to within 10 mm.

6.3.   Measuring instruments

6.3.1.   Speed

The impact speed shall be 35 ± 0,5 km/h the instrument used to record the speed on impact shall be accurate to within 0,1 percent.

6.3.2.   Loads

Measuring instruments shall meet the specifications set forth in ISO 6487:1987

| CFC for all blocks: | 60 Hz |
| --- | --- |
| CAC for blocks 1 and 3: | 200 kN |
| CAC for blocks 4,5 and 6: | 100 kN |
| CAC for block 2: | 200 kN |

CFC for all blocks:

60 Hz

CAC for blocks 1 and 3:

200 kN

CAC for blocks 4,5 and 6:

100 kN

CAC for block 2:

200 kN

6.3.3.   Acceleration

| 6.3.3.1. | The acceleration in the longitudinal direction shall be measured at three separate positions on the trolley, one centrally and one at each side, at places not subject to bending. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3.1.

| 6.3.3.2. | The central accelerometer shall be located within 500 mm of the location of the centre of gravity of the MDB and shall lie in a vertical longitudinal plane which is within ± 10 mm of the centre of gravity of the MDB. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3.2.

| 6.3.3.3. | The side accelerometers shall be at the same height as each other ± 10 mm and at the same distance from the front surface of the MDB ± 20 mm |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3.3.

| 6.3.3.4. | The instrumentation shall comply with ISO 6487:1987 with the following specifications:
  CFC 1 000 Hz (before integration)
  CAC 50 g |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3.4.

CFC 1 000 Hz (before integration)

CAC 50 g

6.4.   General specifications of barrier

| 6.4.1. | The individual characteristics of each barrier shall comply with paragraph 1. of this annex and shall be recorded. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.

6.5.   General specifications of the impactor

| 6.5.1. | The suitability of an impactor as regards the dynamic test requirements shall be confirmed when the outputs from the six load cell plates each produce signals complying with the requirements indicated in this annex. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.1.

| 6.5.2. | Impactors shall carry consecutive serial numbers which are stamped, etched or otherwise permanently attached, from which the batches for the individual blocks and the date of manufacture can be established. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.2.

6.6.   Data processing procedure

| 6.6.1. | Raw data: At time T = T0, all offsets should be removed from the data. The method by which offsets are removed shall be recorded in the test report. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.1.

6.6.2.   Filtering

| 6.6.2.1. | The raw data will be filtered prior to processing/calculations. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2.1.

| 6.6.2.2. | Accelerometer data for integration will be filtered to CFC 180, ISO 6487:1987. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2.2.

| 6.6.2.3. | Accelerometer data for impulse calculations will be filtered to CFC 60, ISO 6487:1987. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2.3.

| 6.6.2.4. | Load cell data will be filtered to CFC 60, ISO 6487:1987. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2.4.

6.6.3.   Calculation of MDB face deflection

| 6.6.3.1. | Accelerometer data from all three accelerometers individually (after filtering at CFC 180), will be integrated twice to obtain deflection of the barrier deformable element. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.1.

| 6.6.3.2. | The initial conditions for deflection are: |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.2.

| 6.6.3.2.1. | velocity = impact velocity (from speed measuring device). |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.2.1.

| 6.6.3.2.2. | deflection = 0 |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.2.2.

| 6.6.3.3. | The deflection at the left hand side, mid-line and right hand side of the mobile deformable barrier will be plotted with respect to time. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.3.

| 6.6.3.4. | The maximum deflection calculated from each of the three accelerometers should be within 10 mm. If it is not the case, then the outlier should be removed and difference between the deflection calculated from the remaining two accelerometers checked to ensure that it is within 10 mm. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.4.

| 6.6.3.5. | If the deflections as measured by the left hand side, right hand side and mid-line accelerometers are within 10 mm, then the mean acceleration of the three accelerometers should be used to calculate the deflection of the barrier face. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.5.

| 6.6.3.6. | If the deflection from only two accelerometers meets the 10 mm requirement, then the mean acceleration from these two accelerometers should be used to calculate the deflection for the barrier face. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.6.

| 6.6.3.7. | If the deflections calculated from all three accelerometers (left hand side, right hand side and mid-line) are NOT within the 10 mm requirement, then the raw data should be reviewed to determine the causes of such large variation. In this case the individual test house will determine which accelerometer data should be used to determine mobile deformable barrier deflection or whether none of the accelerometer readings can be used, in which case, the certification test must be repeated. A full explanation should be given in the test report. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.7.

| 6.6.3.8. | The mean deflection-time data will be combined with the load cell wall force-time data to generate the force-deflection result for each block. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.8.

6.6.4.   Calculation of energy

The absorbed energy for each block and for the whole MDB face should be calculated up to the point of peak deflection of the barrier.

Formula

where:

| t0 | is the time of first contact |
| --- | --- |
| t1 | is the time where the trolley comes to rest, i.e. where u = 0. |
| s | is the deflection of the trolley deformable element calculated according to paragraph 6.6.3. |

t0

is the time of first contact

t1

is the time where the trolley comes to rest, i.e. where u = 0.

s

is the deflection of the trolley deformable element calculated according to paragraph 6.6.3.

6.6.5.   Verification of dynamic force data

| 6.6.5.1. | Compare the total impulse, I, calculated from the integration of the total force over the period of contact, with the momentum change over that period (M*)V). |
| --- | --- |

6.6.5.1.

| 6.6.5.2. | Compare the total energy change to the change in kinetic energy of the MDB, given by:





  where Vi is the impact velocity and M the whole mass of the MDB
  If the momentum change (M*)V) is not equal to the total impulse (I) ± 5 per cent, or if the total energy absorbed (E En) is not equal to the kinetic energy, EK ± 5 per cent, then the test data must be examined to determine the cause of this error. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.5.2.

Formula

where Vi is the impact velocity and M the whole mass of the MDB

If the momentum change (M*)V) is not equal to the total impulse (I) ± 5 per cent, or if the total energy absorbed (E En) is not equal to the kinetic energy, EK ± 5 per cent, then the test data must be examined to determine the cause of this error.

DESIGN OF IMPACTOR (2)

Figure 1

Zone 5

Zone 1

Zone 4

Zone 2

Zone 6

Zone 3

Figure 2

(including the front plate but not the back plate)

Level B

IMPACTOR TOP

Figure 3

Aluminium Honeycomb Orientation

Expansion direction of the Aluminium honeycomb

Direction L

Direction W

Figure 4

Dimension of Aluminium Honeycomb Cells

DESIGN OF THE BACK PLATE

Figure 5

Figure 6

Attachment of backplate to ventillation device and trolley face plate

Ventilation device

Cork gasket

Spacer

Side View

Front plate of trolley

Figure 7

Staggered pitch for the back plate ventilation holes

Figure 8

Top and bottom back plate flanges

| Note: | The attachment holes in the bottom flange may be opened to slots, as shown below, for ease of attachment provided sufficient grip can be developed to avoid detachment during the whole impact test. |
| --- | --- |

Note:

Bottom

Trolley side

Barrier side

VENTILATION FRAME

The ventilation device is a structure made of a plate that is 5 mm thick and 20 mm wide. Only the vertical plates are perforated with nine 8 mm holes in order to let air circulate horizontally.

Figure 9

50 mm between 2 plates

Thickness: 20 mm

Front View

Plates (50 × 50 × 4 mm) to fix the device on trolley by M8 screws.

Lateral view of vertical struts

Section

Side View

---

(1)  The amounts of energy indicated are the amounts of energy dissipated by the system when the extent to which the impactor is crushed is greatest.

(2)  All dimensions are in mm. The tolerances on the dimensions of the blocks allow for the difficulties of measuring cut aluminium honeycomb. The tolerance on the overall dimension of the impactor is less than that for the individual blocks since the honeycomb blocks can be adjusted, with overlap if necessary, to maintain a more closely defined impact face dimension.

Appendix 1

FORCE-DEFLECTION CURVES FOR STATIC TESTS

Figure 1a

| Blocks 1 & 3 | |
| --- | --- |

Blocks 1 & 3

Image 18

Figure 1b

| Block 2 | |
| --- | --- |

Block 2

Image 19

Figure 1c

| Block 4 | |
| --- | --- |

Block 4

Image 20

Figure 1d

| Blocks 5 & 6 | |
| --- | --- |

Blocks 5 & 6

Image 21

Appendix 2

FORCE-DEFLECTION CURVES FOR DYNAMIC TESTS

Figure 2a

| Blocks 1 & 3 | |
| --- | --- |

Blocks 1 & 3

Image 22

Figure 2b

| Block 2 | |
| --- | --- |

Block 2

Image 23

Figure 2c

| Block 4 | |
| --- | --- |

Block 4

Image 24

Figure 2d

| Blocks 5 & 6 | |
| --- | --- |

Blocks 5 & 6

Image 25

Figure 2e

| Blocks total | |
| --- | --- |

Blocks total

Image 26

---

ANNEX 6

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SIDE IMPACT DUMMY

1.   GENERAL

| 1.1. | The side impact dummy prescribed in this Regulation, including the instrumentation and calibration, is described in technical drawings and a user's manual (1). |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

| 1.2. | The dimensions and masses of the side impact dummy represent a 50th percentile adult male, without lower arms. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

| 1.3. | The side impact dummy consists of a metal and plastic skeleton covered by flesh-simulating rubber, plastic and foam. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

2.   CONSTRUCTION

| 2.1. | For an overview of the side impact dummy see Figure 1 for a scheme and the parts breakdown in Table 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

2.2.   Head

| 2.2.1. | The head is shown as part No1 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

| 2.2.2. | The head consists of an aluminium shell covered by a pliable vinyl skin. The interior of the shell is a cavity accommodating tri-axial accelerometers and ballast. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

| 2.2.3. | At the head-neck interface a load cell replacement is built in. This part can be replaced with an upper neck load-cell. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

2.3.   Neck

| 2.3.1. | The neck is shown as part No 2 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1.

| 2.3.2. | The neck consists of a head-neck interface piece, a neck-thorax interface piece and a central section that links the two interfaces to one another. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2.

| 2.3.3. | The head-neck interface piece (part No 2a) and the neck-thorax interface piece (part No 2c) both consist of two aluminium disks linked together by means of a half spherical screw and eight rubber buffers. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.3.

| 2.3.4. | The cylindrical central section (part No 2b) is made of rubber. At both sides an aluminium disk of the interface pieces is moulded in the rubber part. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.4.

| 2.3.5. | The neck is mounted on the neck-bracket, shown as part No 2d in Figure 1 of this annex. This bracket can optionally be replaced with a lower neck load-cell. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.5.

| 2.3.6. | The angle between the two faces of the neck-bracket is 25 degrees. Because the shoulder block is inclined 5 degrees backwards, the resulting angle between the neck and torso is 20 degrees. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.6.

2.4.   Shoulder

| 2.4.1. | The shoulder is shown as part No 3 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.1.

| 2.4.2. | The shoulder consists of a shoulder box, two clavicles and a shoulder foam cap. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.2.

| 2.4.3. | The shoulder box (part No 3a) consists of an aluminium spacer block, an aluminium plate on top and an aluminium plate on the bottom of the spacer block. Both plates are covered with a polytetrafluoretheen (PTFE)-coating. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.3.

| 2.4.4. | The clavicles (part No 3b), made of cast polyurethane (PU)-resin, are designed to evolve over the spacer block. The clavicles are held back in their neutral position by two elastic cords (part No 3c) which are clamped to the rear of the shoulder box. The outer edge of both clavicles accommodates a design allowing for standard arm positions. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.4.

| 2.4.5. | The shoulder cap (part No 3d) is made of low-density polyurethane foam and is attached to the shoulder block. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.5.

2.5.   Thorax

| 2.5.1. | The thorax is shown as part No 4 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.1.

| 2.5.2. | The thorax consists of a rigid thoracic spine box and three identical rib modules. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.2.

| 2.5.3. | The thoracic spine box (part No 4a) is made of steel. On the rear surface a steel spacer and curved, polyurethane (PU)-resin, back plate is mounted (part No 4b). |
| --- | --- |

2.5.3.

| 2.5.4. | The top surface of the thoracic spine box is inclined 5 degrees backwards. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.4.

| 2.5.5. | At the lower side of the spine box a T12 load cell or load cell replacement (part No 4j) is mounted. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.5.

| 2.5.6. | A rib module (part No 4c) consists of a steel rib bow covered by a flesh-simulating open-cell polyurethane (PU) foam (part No 4d), a linear guide system assembly (part No 4e) linking the rib and spine box together, a hydraulic damper (part No 4f) and a stiff damper spring (part No 4g). |
| --- | --- |

2.5.6.

| 2.5.7. | The linear guide system (part No 4e) allows the sensitive rib side of the rib bow (part No 4d) to deflect with respect to the spine box (part No 4a) and the non-sensitive side. The guide system assembly is equipped with linear needle bearings. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.7.

| 2.5.8. | A tuning spring is located in the guide system assembly (part No 4h). |
| --- | --- |

2.5.8.

| 2.5.9. | A rib displacement transducer (part No 4i) can be installed on the spine box mounted part of guide system (part No 4e) and connected to the outer end of the guide system at the sensitive side of the rib. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.9.

2.6.   Arms

| 2.6.1. | The arms are shown as part No 5 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.1.

| 2.6.2. | The arms have a plastic skeleton covered by a polyurethane (PU) flesh representation with a polyvinylchloride (PVC) skin. The flesh representation consists of a high-density polyurethane (PU) moulding upper part and a polyurethane (PU) foam lower part. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.2.

| 2.6.3. | The shoulder-arm joint allows for discrete arm positions at 0, 40 and 90 degree setting with respect to the torso axis. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.3.

| 2.6.4. | The shoulder-arm joint allows for a flexion-extension rotation only. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.4.

2.7.   Lumbar spine

| 2.7.1. | The lumbar spine is shown as part No 6 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.

| 2.7.2. | The lumbar spine consists of a solid rubber cylinder with two steel interface plates at each end, and a steel cable inside the cylinder. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.2.

2.8.   Abdomen

| 2.8.1. | The abdomen is shown as part No 7 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.1.

| 2.8.2. | The abdomen consists of a rigid central part and a foam covering. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.2.

| 2.8.3. | The central part of the abdomen is a metal casting (part No 7a). A cover plate is mounted on top of the casting. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.3.

| 2.8.4. | The covering (part No 7b) is made of polyurethane (PU) foam. A curved slab of rubber filled with lead-pellets is integrated in the foam covering at both sides |
| --- | --- |

2.8.4.

| 2.8.5. | Between the foam covering and the rigid casting at each side of the abdomen, either three force transducers (part No 7c) or three non-measuring replacement units can be mounted. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.5.

2.9.   Pelvis

| 2.9.1. | The pelvis is shown as part No 8 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.1.

| 2.9.2. | The pelvis consists of a sacrum block, two iliac wings, two hip joints assemblies and a flesh simulating foam covering. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.2.

| 2.9.3. | The sacrum (part No 8a) consists of a mass tuned metal block and a metal plate mounted on top of this block. In the aft side of the block is a cavity to facilitate the application of instrumentation. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.3.

| 2.9.4. | The iliac wings (part No 8b) are made of polyurethane (PU)-resin. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.4.

| 2.9.5. | The hip joints assemblies (part No 8c) are made of steel parts. They consist of an upper femur bracket and a ball joint connected to an axle passing through the dummy's H-point.
  The upper femur bracket abduction and adduction capability is buffered by rubber stops at the ends of the range of motion. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.5.

The upper femur bracket abduction and adduction capability is buffered by rubber stops at the ends of the range of motion.

| 2.9.6. | The flesh system (part No 8d) is made of a polyvinlychloride (PVC) skin filled with polyurethane (PU) foam. At the H-point location the skin is replaced by open-cell polyurethane (PU) foam block (part No 8e) backed up with a steel plate fixed on the iliac wing by an axle support going through the ball joint. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.6.

| 2.9.7. | The iliac wings are attached to the sacrum block at the aft side and linked together at the pubic symphysis location by a force transducer (part No 8f) or a replacement transducer. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.7.

2.10.   Legs

| 2.10.1. | The legs are shown as part No 9 in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.1.

| 2.10.2. | The legs consist of a metal skeleton covered by flesh-stimulating polyurethane (PU) foam with a polyvinlychloride (PVC) skin. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.2.

| 2.10.3. | A high-density polyurethane (PU) moulding with a polyvinlychloride (PVC) skin represents the thigh flesh of the upper legs. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.3.

| 2.10.4. | The knee and ankle joint allow for a flexion/extension rotation only. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.4.

2.11.   Suit

| 2.11.1. | The suit is not shown in Figure 1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.1.

| 2.11.2. | The suit is made of rubber and covers the shoulders, thorax, upper part of the arms, the abdomen and lumbar spine, the upper part of the pelvis. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.2.

Figure 1

Construction of side impact dummy

Side View

Front View

Front View

Side View

Top View

Front View

Front View

Top View

Table

Side Impact Dummy Components (See Figure 1)

| Part | No | Description | Number per dummy |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| 1 | | Head | 1 |
| 2 | | Neck | 1 |
| | 2a | Head-neck interface | 1 |
| | 2b | Central section | 1 |
| | 2c | Neck-thorax interface | 1 |
| | 2d | Neck-bracket | 1 |
| 3 | | Shoulder | 1 |
| | 3a | Shoulder box | 1 |
| | 3b | Clavicle | 2 |
| | 3c | Elastic cord | 2 |
| | 3d | Shoulder foam cap | 1 |
| 4 | | Thorax | 1 |
| | 4a | Thoracic spine | 1 |
| | 4b | Back plate (curved) | 1 |
| | 4c | Rib module | 3 |
| | 4d | Rib bow covered with flesh | 3 |
| | 4e | Piston-cylinder assembly | 3 |
| | 4f | Damper | 3 |
| | 4g | Stiff damper spring | 3 |
| | 4h | Tuning spring | 3 |
| | 4i | Displacement transducer | 3 |
| | 4j | T12 load cell or load cell replacement | 1 |
| 5 | | Arm | 2 |
| 6 | | Lumbar spine | 1 |
| 7 | | Abdomen | 1 |
| | 7a | Central casting | 1 |
| | 7b | Foam covering | 1 |
| | 7c | Force transducer or replacement | 3 |
| 8 | | Pelvis | 1 |
| | 8a | Sacrum block | 1 |
| | 8b | Iliac wings | 2 |
| | 8c | Hip joint assembly | 2 |
| | 8d | Flesh covering | 1 |
| | 8e | H-point foam block | 1 |
| | 8f | Force transducer or replacement | 1 |
| 9 | | Leg | 2 |
| 10 | | Suit | 1 |

Part

No

Description

Number per dummy

1

Head

1

2

Neck

1

2a

Head-neck interface

1

2b

Central section

1

2c

Neck-thorax interface

1

2d

Neck-bracket

1

3

Shoulder

1

3a

Shoulder box

1

3b

Clavicle

2

3c

Elastic cord

2

3d

Shoulder foam cap

1

4

Thorax

1

4a

Thoracic spine

1

4b

Back plate (curved)

1

4c

Rib module

3

4d

Rib bow covered with flesh

3

4e

Piston-cylinder assembly

3

4f

Damper

3

4g

Stiff damper spring

3

4h

Tuning spring

3

4i

Displacement transducer

3

4j

T12 load cell or load cell replacement

1

5

Arm

2

6

Lumbar spine

1

7

Abdomen

1

7a

Central casting

1

7b

Foam covering

1

7c

Force transducer or replacement

3

8

Pelvis

1

8a

Sacrum block

1

8b

Iliac wings

2

8c

Hip joint assembly

2

8d

Flesh covering

1

8e

H-point foam block

1

8f

Force transducer or replacement

1

9

Leg

2

10

Suit

1

3.   ASSEMBLY OF THE DUMMY

3.1.   Head-neck

| 3.1.1. | The required torque on the half-spherical screws for assembly of the neck is 10 Nm. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

| 3.1.2. | The head-upper neck load cell assembly is mounted to the head-neck interface plate of the neck by four screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

| 3.1.3. | The neck-thorax interface plate of the neck is mounted to the neck-bracket by four screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

3.2.   Neck-shoulder-thorax

| 3.2.1. | The neck-bracket is mounted to the shoulder block by four screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

| 3.2.2. | The shoulder-block is mounted to the top-surface of the thoracic spine box by three screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

3.3.   Shoulder-arm

| 3.3.1. | The arms are mounted to the shoulder clavicles by means of a screw and an axial bearing. The screw shall be tightened to obtain a 1 2 g holding force of the arm on its pivot. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.1.

3.4.   Thorax-lumbar spine-abdomen

| 3.4.1. | The mounting direction of rib modules in the thorax shall be adapted to the required impact side. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

| 3.4.2. | A lumbar spine adapter is mounted to the T12 load cell or load cell replacement at the lower part of the thoracic spine by two screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.2.

| 3.4.3. | The lumbar spine adapter is mounted to the top plate of the lumbar spine with four screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.3.

| 3.4.4. | The mounting flange of the central abdominal casting is clamped between the lumbar spine adapter and the lumbar spine top plate. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.4.

| 3.4.5. | The location of the abdominal force transducers shall be adapted to the required impact side. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.5.

3.5.   Lumbar spine-pelvis-legs

| 3.5.1. | The lumbar spine is mounted to the sacrum block cover plate by three screws. In case of using the lower lumbar spine load cell four screws are used. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.1.

| 3.5.2. | The lumbar spine bottom plate is mounted to the sacrum block of the pelvis by three screws. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.

| 3.5.3. | The legs are mounted to the upper femur bracket of the pelvis hip joint assembly by a screw. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.3.

| 3.5.4. | The knee and ankle links in the legs can be adjusted to obtain a 1 2 g holding force. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.4.

4.   MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

4.1.   Mass

| 4.1.1. | The masses of the main dummy components are presented in table 2 of this annex.
  Table 2
  Dummy Component Masses








  Component (body part) | Mass
  (kg) | Tolerance
  ± (kg) | Principle contents |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Head | 4,0 | 0,2 | Complete head assembly including tri-axial accelerometer and upper neck load cell or replacement |
| Neck | 1,0 | 0,05 | Neck, not including neck bracket |
| Thorax | 22,4 | 1,0 | Neck bracket, shoulder cap, shoulders assembly, arm attachment bolts, spine box, torso back plate, rib modules, rib deflection transducers, torso back plate load cell or replacement, T12–load cell or replacement, abdomen central casting, abdominal force transducers, 2/3 of suit |
| Arm (each) | 1,3 | 0,1 | Upper arm, including arm positioning plate (each) |
| Abdomen and lumbar spine | 5,0 | 0,25 | Abdomen flesh covering and lumbar spine |
| Pelvis | 12,0 | 0,6 | Sacrum block, lumbar spine mounting plate, hip ball joints, upper femur brackets, iliac wings, pubic force transducer, pelvis flesh covering, 1/3 of suit |
| Leg (each) | 12,7 | 0,6 | Foot, lower and upper leg and flesh as far as junction with upper femur (each) |
| Total dummy | 72,0 | 1,2 | |

4.1.1.

Table 2

Dummy Component Masses

Component (body part)

Mass

(kg)

Tolerance

± (kg)

Principle contents

Head

4,0

0,2

Complete head assembly including tri-axial accelerometer and upper neck load cell or replacement

Neck

1,0

0,05

Neck, not including neck bracket

Thorax

22,4

1,0

Neck bracket, shoulder cap, shoulders assembly, arm attachment bolts, spine box, torso back plate, rib modules, rib deflection transducers, torso back plate load cell or replacement, T12–load cell or replacement, abdomen central casting, abdominal force transducers, 2/3 of suit

Arm (each)

1,3

0,1

Upper arm, including arm positioning plate (each)

Abdomen and lumbar spine

5,0

0,25

Abdomen flesh covering and lumbar spine

Pelvis

12,0

0,6

Sacrum block, lumbar spine mounting plate, hip ball joints, upper femur brackets, iliac wings, pubic force transducer, pelvis flesh covering, 1/3 of suit

Leg (each)

12,7

0,6

Foot, lower and upper leg and flesh as far as junction with upper femur (each)

Total dummy

72,0

1,2

4.2.   Principal dimensions

| 4.2.1. | The principal dimensions of the side impact dummy, based on Figure 2 of this annex, are given in table 3 of this annex.
  The dimension are measured without suit
  Figure 2
  Measurements for principal dummy dimensions (see Table 3)




  Note: The dimensions are to be measured without suit
  H-point
  Table 3
  Principal Dummy Dimensions







  No | Parameter | Dimension (mm) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| 1 | Sitting height | 909 ± 9 |
| 2 | Seat to shoulder joint | 565 ± 7 |
| 3 | Seat to lower face of thoracic spine box | 351 ± 5 |
| 4 | Seat to hip joint (centre of bolt) | 100 ± 3 |
| 5 | Sole to seat, sitting | 442 ± 9 |
| 6 | Head width | 155 ± 3 |
| 7 | Shoulder/arm width | 470 ± 9 |
| 8 | Thorax width | 327 ± 5 |
| 9 | Abdomen width | 280 ± 7 |
| 10 | Pelvis lap width | 366 ± 7 |
| 11 | Head depth | 201 ± 5 |
| 12 | Thorax depth | 267 ± 5 |
| 13 | Abdomen depth | 199 ± 5 |
| 14 | Pelvis depth | 240 ± 5 |
| 15 | Back of buttocks to hip joint (centre of bolt) | 155 ± 5 |
| 16 | Back of buttocks to front knee | 606 ± 9 |

4.2.1.

The dimension are measured without suit

Figure 2

Measurements for principal dummy dimensions (see Table 3)

Note: The dimensions are to be measured without suit

H-point

Table 3

Principal Dummy Dimensions

No

Parameter

Dimension (mm)

1

Sitting height

909 ± 9

2

Seat to shoulder joint

565 ± 7

3

Seat to lower face of thoracic spine box

351 ± 5

4

Seat to hip joint (centre of bolt)

100 ± 3

5

Sole to seat, sitting

442 ± 9

6

Head width

155 ± 3

7

Shoulder/arm width

470 ± 9

8

Thorax width

327 ± 5

9

Abdomen width

280 ± 7

10

Pelvis lap width

366 ± 7

11

Head depth

201 ± 5

12

Thorax depth

267 ± 5

13

Abdomen depth

199 ± 5

14

Pelvis depth

240 ± 5

15

Back of buttocks to hip joint (centre of bolt)

155 ± 5

16

Back of buttocks to front knee

606 ± 9

5.   CERTIFICATION OF THE DUMMY

5.1.   Impact side

| 5.1.1. | Depending on the vehicle side to be impacted, dummy parts should be certified on the left-hand side or right-hand side. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.1.

| 5.1.2. | The configurations of the dummy with regards to the mounting direction of the rib modules and the location of the abdominal force transducers shall be adapted to the required impact side. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.2.

5.2.   Instrumentation

| 5.2.1. | All instrumentation shall be calibrated in compliance with the requirements of the documentation specified in paragraph 1.3. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.

| 5.2.2. | All instrumentation channels shall comply with ISO 6487:2000 or SAE J211 (March 1995) data channel recording specification. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.2.

| 5.2.3. | The minimum number of channels required to comply with this regulation is ten:






  Head accelerations | (3), |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Thorax rib displacements | (3), |
| Abdomen loads | (3) and |
| Pubic symphysis load | (1). |

5.2.3.

Head accelerations

(3),

Thorax rib displacements

(3),

Abdomen loads

(3) and

Pubic symphysis load

(1).

| 5.2.4. | Additionally a number of optional instrumentation channels (38) are available:






  Upper neck loads | (6), |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Lower neck loads | (6), |
| Clavicle loads | (3), |
| Torso back plate loads | (4), |
| T1 accelerations | (3), |
| T12 accelerations | (3), |
| Rib accelerations | (6, two on each rib), |
| T12 spine loads | (4), |
| Lower lumbar loads | (3), |
| Pelvis accelerations | (3) and |
| Femur loads | (6). |

5.2.4.

Upper neck loads

(6),

Lower neck loads

(6),

Clavicle loads

(3),

Torso back plate loads

(4),

T1 accelerations

(3),

T12 accelerations

(3),

Rib accelerations

(6, two on each rib),

T12 spine loads

(4),

Lower lumbar loads

(3),

Pelvis accelerations

(3) and

Femur loads

(6).

Additional four position indicator channels are optionally available:

| Thorax rotations | (2) and |
| --- | --- |
| Pelvis rotations | (2) |

Thorax rotations

(2) and

Pelvis rotations

(2)

5.3.   Visual check

| 5.3.1. | All dummy parts should be visually checked for damage and if necessary replaced before the certification test. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

5.4.   General test set-up

| 5.4.1. | Figure 3 of this annex shows the test set-up for all certification tests on the side impact dummy. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.1.

| 5.4.2. | The certification test set-up arrangements and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the specification and requirements of the documentation specified in paragraph 1.3. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.2.

| 5.4.3. | The tests on the head, neck, thorax and lumbar spine are carried out on sub assemblies of the dummy. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.3.

| 5.4.4. | The tests on the shoulder, abdomen and pelvis are performed with the complete dummy (without suit, shoes and underwear). In these tests the dummy is seated on a flat surface with two sheets of less than or equal to 2 mm thick polytetrafluoretheen (PTFE), placed between the dummy and the flat surface. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.4.

| 5.4.5. | All parts to be certified should be kept in the test room for a period of at least four hours at a temperature between and including 18 and 22 degrees Celsius and a relative humidity between and including 10 and 70 per cent prior to a test. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.5.

| 5.4.6. | The time between two certification tests on the same part should be at least 30 minutes. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.6.

5.5.   Head

| 5.5.1. | The head sub assembly, including the upper neck load cell replacement, is certified in a drop test from 200 ± 1 mm onto a flat, rigid impact surface. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.1.

| 5.5.2. | The angle between the impact surface and the mid-sagittal plane of the head is 35 ± 1 degree allowing an impact to the upper part of the head side (this can be realised with a sling harness or a head drop support bracket with a mass of 0,075±0,005 kg.). |
| --- | --- |

5.5.2.

| 5.5.3. | The peak resultant head acceleration, filtered using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 1 000, should be between and including 100 g and 150 g. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.

| 5.5.4. | The head performance can be adjusted to meet the requirement by altering the friction characteristics of the skin-skull interface (e.g. by lubrication with talcum powder or polytetrafluoretheen (PTFE) spray). |
| --- | --- |

5.5.4.

5.6.   Neck

| 5.6.1. | The head-neck interface of the neck is mounted to a special certification head-form with a mass of 3,9±0,05 kg (see Figure 6), with the help of a 12 mm thick interface plate with a mass of 0,205±0,05 kg. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.1.

| 5.6.2. | The head-form and neck are mounted upside-down to the bottom of a neck-pendulum (2) allowing a lateral motion of the system. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.2.

| 5.6.3. | The neck-pendulum is equipped with a uni-axial accelerometer according to the neck pendulum specification (see Figure 5). |
| --- | --- |

5.6.3.

| 5.6.4. | The neck-pendulum should be allowed to fall freely from a height chosen to achieve an impact velocity of 3,4±0,1 m/s measured at the pendulum accelerometer location. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.4.

| 5.6.5. | The neck-pendulum is decelerated from impact velocity to zero by an appropriate device (3), as described in the neck pendulum specification (see Figure 5), resulting in a velocity change — time history inside the corridor specified in Figure 7 and Table 4 of this annex. All channels have to be recorded according to the ISO 6487:2000 or SAE J211 (March 1995) data channel recording specification and filtered digitally using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 180.
  Table 4
  Pendulum Velocity Change — Time Corridor for Neck Certification Test








  Upper Boundary | | Lower Boundary | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Time (s) | Velocity (m/s) | Time (s) | Velocity (m/s) |
| 0,001 | 0,0 | 0 | -0,05 |
| 0,003 | -0,25 | 0,0025 | -0,375 |
| 0,014 | -3,2 | 0,0135 | -3,7 |
| | | 0,017 | -3,7 |

5.6.5.

Table 4

Pendulum Velocity Change — Time Corridor for Neck Certification Test

Upper Boundary

Lower Boundary

Time (s)

Velocity (m/s)

Time (s)

Velocity (m/s)

0,001

0,0

0

-0,05

0,003

-0,25

0,0025

-0,375

0,014

-3,2

0,0135

-3,7

0,017

-3,7

| 5.6.6. | The maximum head-form flexion angle relative to the pendulum (Angle dθA + dθC in Figure 6) should be between and including 49,0 and 59,0 degrees and should occur between and including 54,0 and 66,0 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.6.

| 5.6.7. | The maximum head-form centre of gravity displacements measured in angle dθA and dθB (see Figure 6) should be: Fore pendulum base angle dθA between and including 32,0 and 37,0 degrees occurring between and including 53,0 and 63,0 ms and aft pendulum base angle dθB between and including 0,81* (angle dθA) +1,75 and 0,81* (angle dθA) +4,25 degrees occurring between and including 54,0 and 64,0 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.7.

| 5.6.8. | The neck performance can be adjusted by replacing the eight circular section buffers with buffers of another shore hardness. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.8.

5.7.   Shoulder

| 5.7.1. | The length of the elastic cord should be adjusted so that a force between and including 27,5 and 32,5 N applied in a forward direction 4 ± 1 mm from the outer edge of the clavicle in the same plane as the clavicle movement, is required to move the clavicle forward. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.1.

| 5.7.2. | The dummy is seated on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface with no back support. The thorax is positioned vertically and the arms should be set at an angle of 40 ± 2 degrees forward to the vertical. The legs are positioned horizontally. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.2.

| 5.7.3. | The impactor is a pendulum with a mass of 23,4±0,2 kg and diameter of 152,4 ±0,25 mm with an edge radius of 12,7 mm (4). The impactor is suspended from rigid hinges by four wires with the centre line of the impactor at least 3,5 m below the rigid hinges (see Figure 4). |
| --- | --- |

5.7.3.

| 5.7.4. | The impactor is equipped with an accelerometer sensitive in the direction of impact and located on the impactor axis. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.4.

| 5.7.5. | The impactor should freely swing onto the shoulder of the dummy with an impact velocity of 4,3±0,1 m/s. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.5.

| 5.7.6. | The impact direction is perpendicular to the anterior-posterior axis of the dummy and the axis of the impactor coincides with the axis of the upper arm pivot. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.6.

| 5.7.7. | The peak acceleration of the impactor, filtered using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 180, should be between and including 7,5 and 10,5 g. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.7.

5.8.   Arms

| 5.8.1. | No dynamic certification procedure is defined for the arms. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.1.

5.9.   Thorax

| 5.9.1. | Each rib module is certified separately. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.1.

| 5.9.2. | The rib module is positioned vertically in a drop test rig and the rib cylinder is clamped rigidly onto the rig. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.2.

| 5.9.3. | The impactor is a free fall mass of 7,78±0,01 kg with a flat face and a diameter of 150 ± 2 mm. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.3.

| 5.9.4. | The centre line of the impactor should be aligned with the centre line of the rib's guide system. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.4.

| 5.9.5. | The impact severity is specified by the drop heights of 815, 204 and 459 mm. These drop heights result in velocities of approximately 4, 2 and 3 m/s respectively. Impact drop heights should be applied with an accuracy of 1 per cent. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.5.

| 5.9.6. | The rib displacement should be measured, for instance using the rib's own displacement transducer. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.6.

| 5.9.7. | The rib certification requirements are given in of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.7.

| 5.9.8. | The performance of the rib module can be adjusted by replacing the tuning spring inside the cylinder with one of a different stiffness. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.8.

Table 5

Requirements for Full Rib Module Certification

| Test sequence | Drop height (accuracy 1 %) | Minimum Displacement | Maximum Displacement |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | (mm) | (mm) | (mm) |
| 1 | 815 | 46,0 | 51,0 |
| 2 | 204 | 23,5 | 27,5 |
| 3 | 459 | 36,0 | 40,0 |

Test sequence

Drop height (accuracy 1 %)

Minimum Displacement

Maximum Displacement

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

1

815

46,0

51,0

2

204

23,5

27,5

3

459

36,0

40,0

5.10.   Lumbar spine

| 5.10.1. | The lumbar spine is mounted to the special certification head-form with a mass of 3,9 ±0,05 kg (see Figure 6), with the help of a 12 mm thick interface plate with a mass of 0,205 ±0,05 kg. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.1.

| 5.10.2. | The head-form and lumbar spine are mounted upside-down to the bottom of a neck-pendulum (5) allowing a lateral motion of the system. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.2.

| 5.10.3. | The neck-pendulum is equipped with an uni-axial accelerometer according to the neck pendulum specification (see Figure 5). |
| --- | --- |

5.10.3.

| 5.10.4. | The neck-pendulum should be allowed to fall freely from a height chosen to achieve an impact velocity of 6,05±0,1 m/s measured at the pendulum accelerometer location. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.4.

| 5.10.5. | The neck-pendulum is decelerated from impact velocity to zero by an appropriate device (6), as described in the neck pendulum specification (see Figure 5), resulting in a velocity change — time history inside the corridor specified in Figure 8 and Table 6 of this annex. All channels have to be recorded according to the ISO 6487:2000 or SAE J211 (March 1995) data channel recording specification and filtered digitally using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 180.
  Table 6
  Pendulum Velocity Change — Time Corridor for Lumbar Spine Certification Test








  Upper Boundary | | Lower Boundary | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Time [s] | Velocity [m/s] | Time [s] | Velocity [m/s] |
| 0,001 | 0,0 | 0 | -0,05 |
| 0,0037 | -0,2397 | 0,0027 | -0,425 |
| 0,027 | -5,8 | 0,0245 | -6,5 |
| | | 0,03 | -6,5 |

5.10.5.

Table 6

Pendulum Velocity Change — Time Corridor for Lumbar Spine Certification Test

Upper Boundary

Lower Boundary

Time [s]

Velocity [m/s]

Time [s]

Velocity [m/s]

0,001

0,0

0

-0,05

0,0037

-0,2397

0,0027

-0,425

0,027

-5,8

0,0245

-6,5

0,03

-6,5

| 5.10.6. | The maximum head-form flexion angle relative to the pendulum (Angle dθA + dθC in Figure 6) should be between and including 45,0 and 55,0 degrees and should occur between and including 39,0 and 53,0 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.6.

| 5.10.7. | The maximum head-form centre of gravity displacements measured in angle dθA and dθB (see Figure 6) should be: Fore pendulum base angle dθA between and including 31,0 and 35,0 degrees occurring between and including 44,0 and 52,0 ms and aft pendulum base angle dθB between and including 0,8*(angle dθA) +2,00 and 0,8*(angle dθA) +4,50 degrees occurring between and including 44,0 and 52,0 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.7.

| 5.10.8. | The performance of the lumbar spine can be adjusted by changing tension in the spine cable. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.8.

5.11.   Abdomen

| 5.11.1. | The dummy is seated on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface with no back support. The thorax is positioned vertically, while the arms and legs are positioned horizontally. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.1.

| 5.11.2. | The impactor is a pendulum with a mass of 23,4±0,2 kg and diameter of 152,4 ±0,25 mm with an edge radius of 12,7 mm (7). The impactor is suspended from rigid hinges by eight wires with the centre line of the impactor at least 3,5 m below the rigid hinges (see Figure 4). |
| --- | --- |

5.11.2.

| 5.11.3. | The impactor is equipped with an accelerometer sensitive in the direction of impact and located on the impactor axis. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.3.

| 5.11.4. | The pendulum is equipped with a horizontal ‘arm rest’ impactor face of 1,0 ±0,01 kg. The total mass of the impactor with the arm rest face is 24,4±0,21 kg. The rigid ‘arm rest’ is 70 ± 1 mm high, 150 ± 1 mm wide and should be allowed to penetrate at least 60 mm into the abdomen. The centreline of the pendulum coincides with the centre of the ‘arm rest’. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.4.

| 5.11.5. | The impactor should freely swing onto the abdomen of the dummy with an impact velocity of 4,0±0,1 m/s. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.5.

| 5.11.6. | The impact direction is perpendicular to the anterior-posterior axis of the dummy and the axis of the impactor is aligned with the centre of the middle abdominal force transducer. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.6.

| 5.11.7. | The peak force of the impactor, obtained from the impactor acceleration filtered using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 180 and multiplied by the impactor/armrest mass, should be between and including 4,0 and 4,8 kN, and occur between and including 10,6 and 13,0 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.7.

| 5.11.8. | The force-time histories measured by the three abdominal force transducers must be summed and filtered using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 600. The peak force of this sum should be between and including 2,2 and 2,7 kN, and occur between and including 10,0 and 12,3 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.8.

5.12.   Pelvis

| 5.12.1. | The dummy is seated on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface with no back support. The thorax is positioned vertically while the arms and legs are positioned horizontally. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.1.

| 5.12.2. | The impactor is a pendulum with a mass of 23,4±0,2 kg and diameter of 152,4 ±0,25 mm with an edge radius of 12,7 mm (8). The impactor is suspended from rigid hinges by eight wires with the centre line of the impactor at least 3,5 m below the rigid hinges (see Figure 4). |
| --- | --- |

5.12.2.

| 5.12.3. | The impactor is equipped with an accelerometer sensitive in the direction of impact and located on the impactor axis. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.3.

| 5.12.4. | The impactor should freely swing onto the pelvis of the dummy with an impact velocity of 4,3±0,1 m/s. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.4.

| 5.12.5. | The impact direction is perpendicular to the anterior-posterior axis of the dummy and the axis of the impactor is aligned with the centre of the H-point back plate. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.5.

| 5.12.6. | The peak force of the impactor, obtained from the impactor acceleration filtered using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 180 and multiplied by the impactor mass, should be between and including 4,4 and 5,4 kN, and occur between and including 10,3 and 15,5 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.6.

| 5.12.7. | The pubic symphysis force, filtered using ISO 6487:2000 CFC 600, should be between and including 1,04 and 1,64 kN and occur between and including 9,9 and 15,9 ms. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.7.

5.13.   Legs

| 5.13.1. | No dynamic certification procedure is defined for the legs. |
| --- | --- |

5.13.1.

Figure 3

Overview of dummy certification test set-up

Figure 4

23,4 kg Pendulum impactor suspension

left: four wires suspension (cross wires removed)

right: eight wires suspension

Figure 5

Neck pendulum specification according to American Code of Federal Regulation (49 CFR Chapter V Part 572.33)

Inertial properties of pendulum, mounting plate and mounting hardware without test specimen.

Weight 29,57 kg (65,31 lbs)

Moment of inertia 33,2 kg-m2 (294 in.-lb-sec2) about pivot axis

Structural steel tube 4,8 mm (0,1875 in.)

CG of pendulum apparatus without test specimen

Accelerometer

Mounting plate

Pendulum striker plate (sharp edges) 76,2 x 152,4 x 9,5 mm (3 x 6 x 3/8 in.)

Before testing, precrush the honeycomb material with the pendulum to assure that 90 % to 100 % of the honeycomb surface is contacting the pendulum striker plate. of the honeycomb surface is contacting the pendulum striker plate.

Aluminum honeycomb hexcel 28,8 kg/m3 (1,8 lb/ft3) REF

Accelerometer

Pendulum centerline

PIVOT 50,8 mm (2 in.) DIA

RADIUS

Figure 6

Neck and lumbar spine certification test set-up (Angles dθA, dθB and dθC measured with head-form)

Head form

47 mm including mounting plate

Neck or Lumbar Spine length

Pendulum base plate

Figure 7

Pendulum velocity change — time corridor for neck certification test

Pendulum velocity change corridor for neck certification

Time in [ms]

Velocity in [m/s]

Figure 8

Pendulum velocity change — time corridor for lumbar spine certification test

Pendulum velocity change corridor for lumbar spine certification

Time in [ms]

Velocity in [m/s]

---

(1)  The dummy is corresponding with the specification of the ES-2 dummy. The number of the table of contents of the technical drawing is: No E-AA-DRAWING-LIST-7-25-032 dated on 25 July 2003. The complete set of ES-2 technical drawings and the ES-2 User Manual are deposited with the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE), Palais des Nations, Geneva, Switzerland and may be consulted on request at the secretariat.

(2)  Neck pendulum corresponding with American Code of Federal Regulation 49 CFR Chapter V Part 572.33 (10-1-00 Edition) (See also Figure 5).

(3)  The use of 3-inch honeycomb is recommended (see Figure 5).

(4)  Pendulum corresponding with American Code of Federal Regulation 49 CFR Chapter V Part 572.36(a) (10-1-00 Edition) (See also Figure 4).

(5)  Neck pendulum corresponding with American Code of Federal Regulation 49 CFR Chapter V Part 572.33 (10-1-00 Edition) (See also Figure 5).

(6)  The use of 6-inch honeycomb is recommended (see Figure 5).

(7)  Pendulum corresponding with American Code of Federal Regulation 49 CFR Chapter V Part 572.36(a) (10-1-00 Edition) (See also Figure 4).

(8)  Pendulum corresponding with American Code of Federal Regulation 49 CFR Chapter V Part 572.36(a) (10-1-00 Edition) (See also Figure 4).

---

ANNEX 7

INSTALLATION OF THE SIDE IMPACT DUMMY

1.   GENERAL

| 1.1. | The side impact dummy as described in annex 6 of this Regulation is to be used according the following installation procedure. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

2.   INSTALLATION

| 2.1. | Adjust the knee and ankle joints so that they just support the lower leg and the foot when extended horizontally (1 to 2 g — adjustment). |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | Check if the dummy is adapted to the desired impact direction. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | The dummy shall be clothed in a form-fitting cotton stretch mid-calf length pant and may be clothed in a form-fitting cotton stretch shirt with short sleeves. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | Each foot shall be equipped with a shoe. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | Place the dummy in the outboard front seat on the impacted side as described in the side impact test procedure specification. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.6. | The plane of symmetry of the dummy shall coincide with the vertical median plane of the specified seating position. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

| 2.7. | The pelvis of the dummy shall be positioned such that a lateral line passing through the dummy H-points is perpendicular to the longitudinal centre plane of the seat. The line through the dummy H-points shall be horizontal with a maximum inclination of ± 2 degrees (1).
  The correct position of the dummy pelvis can be checked relative to the H-point of the H-point Manikin by using the M3 holes in the H-point back plates at each side of the ES-2 pelvis. The M3 holes are indicated with ‘Hm’. The ‘Hm’ position should be in a circle with a radius of 10 mm round the H-point of the H-point Manikin. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

The correct position of the dummy pelvis can be checked relative to the H-point of the H-point Manikin by using the M3 holes in the H-point back plates at each side of the ES-2 pelvis. The M3 holes are indicated with ‘Hm’. The ‘Hm’ position should be in a circle with a radius of 10 mm round the H-point of the H-point Manikin.

| 2.8. | The upper torso shall be bent forward and then laid back firmly against the seat back (see note 14). The shoulders of the dummy shall be set fully rearward. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

| 2.9. | Irrespective of the seating position of the dummy, the angle between the upper arm and the torso arm reference line on each side shall be 40 ± 5 degrees. The torso arm reference line is defined as the intersection of the plane tangential to the front surface of the ribs and the longitudinal vertical plane of the dummy containing the arm. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

| 2.10. | For the driver's seating position, without inducing pelvis or torso movement, place the right foot of the dummy on the non-depressed accelerator pedal with the heel resting as far forward as possible on the floor-pan. Set the left foot perpendicular to the lower leg with the heel resting on the floor-pan in the same lateral line as the right heel. Set the knees of the dummy such that their outside surfaces are 150 ± 10 mm from the plane of symmetry of the dummy. If possible within these constraints, place the thighs of the dummy in contact with the seat cushion. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

| 2.11. | For other seating positions, without inducing pelvis or torso movement, place the heels of the dummy as far forward as possible on the floor-pan without compressing the seat cushion more than the compression due to the weight of the leg. Set the knees of the dummy such that their outside surfaces are 150 ± 10 mm from the plane of symmetry of the dummy. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

---

(1)  The dummy can be equipped with tilt sensors in the thorax and the pelvis. These instruments can help to obtain the desired position.

---

ANNEX 8

PART IAL TEST

1.   PURPOSE

The purpose of these tests is to verify whether the modified vehicle presents at least the same (or better) energy absorption characteristics than the vehicle type approved under this Regulation.

2.   PROCEDURES AND INSTALLATIONS

2.1.   Reference tests

| 2.1.1. | Using the initial padding materials tested during the approval of the vehicle, mounted in a new lateral structure of the vehicle to be approved, two dynamic tests, utilizing two different impactors shall be carried out (Figure 1). |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.

| 2.1.1.1. | The head form impactor, defined in paragraph 3.1.1, shall hit at 24,1 km/h, in the area impacted for the EUROSID head during the approval of the vehicle. Test result shall be recorded, and the HPC calculated. However, this test shall not be carried out when, during the tests described in Annex 4 of this Regulation: | where there has been no head contact, or |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.1.1.1.

where there has been no head contact, or

| | when the head contacted the window glazing only, provided that the window glazing is not laminated glass. |
| --- | --- |

when the head contacted the window glazing only, provided that the window glazing is not laminated glass.

| 2.1.1.2. | The body block impactor, defined in paragraph 3.2.1, shall hit at 24,1 km/h in the lateral area impacted by the EUROSID shoulder, arm and thorax, during the approval of the vehicle. Test result shall be recorded, and the HPC calculated. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

2.2.   Approval test

| 2.2.1. | Using the new padding materials, seat, etc. presented for the approval extension, and mounted in a new lateral structure of the vehicle, tests specified in paragraphs 2.1.1.1 and 2.1.1.2, shall be repeated, the new results recorded, and their HPC calculated. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

| 2.2.1.1. | If the HPC calculated from the results of both approval tests are lower than the HPC obtained during the reference tests (carried out using the original type approved padding materials or seats), the extension shall be granted. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.1.

| 2.2.1.2. | If the new HPC are greater than the HPC obtained during the reference tests, a new full scale test (using the proposed padding/seats/etc.) shall be carried out. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.2.

3.   TEST EQUIPMENT

3.1.   Head form impactor (Figure 2)

| 3.1.1. | This apparatus consists of a fully guided linear impactor, rigid, with a mass of 6,8 kg. Its impact surface is hemispherical with a diameter of 165 mm. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

| 3.1.2. | The head form shall be fitted with two accelerometers and a speed-measuring device, all capable of measuring values in the impact direction. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

3.2.   Body block impactor (Figure 3)

| 3.2.1. | This apparatus consists of a fully guided linear impactor, rigid, with a mass of 30 kg. Its dimensions and transversal section is presented in Figure 3. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

| 3.2.2. | The body block shall be fitted with two accelerometers and a speed-measuring device, all capable of measuring values in the impact direction. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

Figure 1

test bench

vehicle structure

padding materials

impactors

Figure 2

Head form impactor

spherical

Figure 3

Body block impactor

A – A

section A - A

r. = 100 mm.

---

| 30.11.2007 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 313/58 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

30.11.2007

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 313/58

---

Regulation No 16 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of:

I.   safety-belts, restraint systems, child restraint systems and Isofix child restraint systems for occupants of power-driven vehicles

II.   vehicles equipped with safety-belts, restraint systems, child restraint systems and Isofix child restraint systems

Addendum 15: Regulation No 16

Revision 5

Only the original UN/ECE texts have legal effect under international public law. The status and date of entry into force of this Regulation should be checked in the latest version of the UN/ECE status document TRANS/WP.29/343, available at: http://www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/wp29wgs/wp29gen/wp29fdocstts.html.

Incorporating all valid text up to:

Incorporating all valid text up to:

Supplement 17 to the 04 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 18 January 2006

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Markings |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Specifications |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Tests |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Requirements concerning the installation in the vehicle |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Modifications and extension of approval of the vehicle type or safety-belt or restraint system type |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Production definitely discontinued |
| --- | --- |

12.

| 13. | Instructions |
| --- | --- |

13.

| 14. | Names and addresses of technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

14.

| 15. | Transitional provisions |
| --- | --- |

15.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1A: | Communication concerning the approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type with regard to safety-belt pursuant to Regulation No 16 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1A:

| Annex 1B: | Communication concerning the approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a type of safety-belt or restraint system for adult occupants of power-driven vehicles pursuant to Regulation No 16 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1B:

| Annex 2: | Arrangements of the approval marks |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2:

| Annex 3: | Diagram of an apparatus to test durability of retractor mechanism |
| --- | --- |

Annex 3:

| Annex 4: | Diagram of an apparatus to test locking of emergency locking retractors |
| --- | --- |

Annex 4:

| Annex 5: | Diagram of an apparatus for dust-resistance test |
| --- | --- |

Annex 5:

| Annex 6: | Description of trolley, seat, anchorages and stopping device |
| --- | --- |

Annex 6:

| Annex 7: | Description of manikin |
| --- | --- |

Annex 7:

| Annex 8: | Description of curve of trolley's deceleration as a function of time |
| --- | --- |

Annex 8:

| Annex 9: | Instructions |
| --- | --- |

Annex 9:

| Annex 10: | Dual buckle test |
| --- | --- |

Annex 10:

| Annex 11: | Abrasion and microslip test |
| --- | --- |

Annex 11:

| Annex 12: | Corrosion test |
| --- | --- |

Annex 12:

| Annex 13: | Order of tests |
| --- | --- |

Annex 13:

| Annex 14: | Control of conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

Annex 14:

| Annex 15: | Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles |
| --- | --- |

Annex 15:

| Appendix 1 — | Description of the three dimensional ‘H’ point machine |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 1 —

| Appendix 2 — | Three-dimensional reference system |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 2 —

| Appendix 3 — | Reference data concerning seating positions |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 3 —

| Annex 16: | Safety-belt installation showing the belt types and retractor types |
| --- | --- |

Annex 16:

| Annex 17: | Requirements for the installation of safety-belts and restraint systems for adult occupants of power-driven vehicles on forward facing seats and for the installation of Isofix child restraint systems |
| --- | --- |

Annex 17:

| Appendix 1 — | Provisions concerning the installation of ‘universal’ category child restraint systems installed with the safety-belt equipment of the vehicle |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 1 —

| Appendix 2 — | Table of vehicle handbook information on child restraint suitability for various seating positions |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 2 —

| Appendix 3 — | Table of vehicle handbook information on child restraint systems installation suitability for various seating positions |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 3 —

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to safety-belts and restraint systems which are designed for installation in vehicles and are intended for separate use, i.e. as individual fittings, by persons of adult build occupying forward or rearward-facing seats. It also applies to child restraint systems and ISOFIX child restraint systems designated for installation in vehicles of category M1 and N1 (*1).

*1

2.   DEFINITIONS

2.1.   Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)

An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.

The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.

2.1.1.   Lap belt

A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.

2.1.2.   Diagonal belt

A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.

2.1.3.   Three-point belt

A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.

2.1.4.   S-type belt

A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.

2.1.5.   Harness belt

A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.

2.2.   Belt type

Belts of different ‘types’ are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:

| 2.2.1. | rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.); |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);

| 2.2.2. | the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or

| 2.2.3. | the geometry of the belt assembly. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

the geometry of the belt assembly.

2.3.   Strap

A flexible component designed to hold the body and to transmit stresses to the belt anchorages.

2.4.   Buckle

A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.

2.5.   Belt adjusting device

A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.

2.6.   Pre-loading device

An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.

| 2.7. | ‘Reference zone’ means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, described in Regulation No 21 Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

‘Reference zone’ means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, described in Regulation No 21 Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm.

| 2.8. | ‘Airbag assembly’ means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

‘Airbag assembly’ means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.

| 2.9. | ‘Passenger airbag’ means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

‘Passenger airbag’ means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.

| 2.10. | ‘Child restraint’ means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

‘Child restraint’ means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.

| 2.11. | ‘Rearward-facing’ means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

‘Rearward-facing’ means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.

2.12.   Attachments

Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.

2.13.   Energy absorber

Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.

2.14.   Retractor

Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.

2.14.1.   Non-locking retractor (type 1)

A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.

2.14.2.   Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)

A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.

2.14.3.   Automatically locking retractor (type 3)

A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.

2.14.4.   Emergency locking retractor (type 4)

A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:

| 2.14.4.1. | deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity). |
| --- | --- |

2.14.4.1.

deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity).

| 2.14.4.2. | a combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity). |
| --- | --- |

2.14.4.2.

a combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).

2.14.5.   Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)

A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 (*2).

*2

2.14.6.   Belt adjustment device for height

A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.

2.15.   Belt anchorages

Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.

2.16.   Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems

Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.

2.17.   Restraint system

A system for a specific vehicle type or a type defined by the vehicle manufacturer and agreed by the Technical Service consisting of a seat and a belt fixed to the vehicle by appropriate means and consisting additionally of all elements which are provided to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of an abrupt vehicle deceleration, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.

2.18.   Seat

A structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person.

| 2.18.1. | ‘A front passenger seat’ means any seat where the ‘foremost H-point’ of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point. |
| --- | --- |

2.18.1.

‘A front passenger seat’ means any seat where the ‘foremost H-point’ of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.

2.19.   Group of seats

Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front of the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.

2.20.   Bench seat

A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.

2.21.   Adjustment system of the seat

The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:

| 2.21.1. | longitudinal displacement; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.1.

longitudinal displacement;

| 2.21.2. | vertical displacement; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.2.

vertical displacement;

| 2.21.3. | angular displacement. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.3.

angular displacement.

2.22.   Seat anchorage

The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.

2.23.   Seat type

A category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:

| 2.23.1. | the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure; |
| --- | --- |

2.23.1.

the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;

| 2.23.2. | the types and dimensions of the seat lock adjustment and locking systems; |
| --- | --- |

2.23.2.

the types and dimensions of the seat lock adjustment and locking systems;

| 2.23.3. | the type and dimensions of the belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure. |
| --- | --- |

2.23.3.

the type and dimensions of the belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.

2.24.   Displacement system of the seat

A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).

2.25.   Locking system of the seat

A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.

2.26.   Enclosed buckle-release button

A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.

2.27.   Non-enclosed buckle-release button

A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.

2.28.   Tension-reducing device

A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.

| 2.29. | ‘Isofix’ is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system, and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system. |
| --- | --- |

2.29.

‘Isofix’ is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system, and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.

| 2.30. | ‘Isofix child restraint system’ means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14. |
| --- | --- |

2.30.

‘Isofix child restraint system’ means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.

| 2.31. | ‘Isofix position’ means a system which allows to install:






  (a) | either a universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44, |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.31.

‘Isofix position’ means a system which allows to install:

(a)

either a universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,

| (b) | or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44, |
| --- | --- |

(b)

or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,

| (c) | or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44, |
| --- | --- |

(c)

or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,

| (d) | or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44, |
| --- | --- |

(d)

or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,

| (e) | or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.

| 2.32. | ‘Isofix anchorages system’ means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device. |
| --- | --- |

2.32.

‘Isofix anchorages system’ means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.

| 2.33. | ‘Isofix low anchorage’ means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments. |
| --- | --- |

2.33.

‘Isofix low anchorage’ means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.

2.34.   ‘Anti-rotation device’

| (a) | An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether. |
| --- | --- |

(a)

An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.

| (b) | An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.

| (c) | For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.

| 2.35. | ‘Isofix top tether anchorage’ means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure. |
| --- | --- |

2.35.

‘Isofix top tether anchorage’ means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.

| 2.36. | A ‘guidance device’ is intended to help the person installing the Isofix child restraint system by physically guiding the Isofix attachments on the Isofix child restraint into correct alignment with the Isofix low anchorages to facilitate engagement. |
| --- | --- |

2.36.

A ‘guidance device’ is intended to help the person installing the Isofix child restraint system by physically guiding the Isofix attachments on the Isofix child restraint into correct alignment with the Isofix low anchorages to facilitate engagement.

| 2.37. | ‘Isofix marking fixture’ means something that informs someone wishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding Isofix anchorages system. |
| --- | --- |

2.37.

‘Isofix marking fixture’ means something that informs someone wishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding Isofix anchorages system.

| 2.38. | ‘Child restraint fixture’ (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system. |
| --- | --- |

2.38.

‘Child restraint fixture’ (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

3.1.   Vehicle type

| 3.1.1. | The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its safety-belts and restraint systems shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its safety-belts and restraint systems shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative.

| 3.1.2. | It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars: |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars:

| 3.1.2.1. | Drawings of the general vehicle structure on an appropriate scale, showing the positions of the safety-belts, and detailed drawings of the safety-belts and of the points to which they are attached; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.1.

Drawings of the general vehicle structure on an appropriate scale, showing the positions of the safety-belts, and detailed drawings of the safety-belts and of the points to which they are attached;

| 3.1.2.2. | A specification of the materials used which may affect the strength of the safety-belts; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.2.

A specification of the materials used which may affect the strength of the safety-belts;

| 3.1.2.3. | A technical description of the safety-belts; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.3.

A technical description of the safety-belts;

| 3.1.2.4. | In the case of safety-belts affixed to the seat structure; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.4.

In the case of safety-belts affixed to the seat structure;

| 3.1.2.5. | Detailed description of the vehicle type with regard to the design of the seats, of the seat anchorages and their adjustment and locking systems; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.5.

Detailed description of the vehicle type with regard to the design of the seats, of the seat anchorages and their adjustment and locking systems;

| 3.1.2.6. | Drawings, on an appropriate scale and in sufficient detail, of the seats, of their anchorages to the vehicle, and of their adjustment and locking systems; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.6.

Drawings, on an appropriate scale and in sufficient detail, of the seats, of their anchorages to the vehicle, and of their adjustment and locking systems;

| 3.1.3. | At the opinion of the manufacturer, a vehicle representative of the vehicle type to be approved or the parts of the vehicle considered essential for the safety-belt tests by the technical service conducting approval tests shall be submitted to the service. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

At the opinion of the manufacturer, a vehicle representative of the vehicle type to be approved or the parts of the vehicle considered essential for the safety-belt tests by the technical service conducting approval tests shall be submitted to the service.

3.2.   Safety-belt type

| 3.2.1. | The application for approval of a type of safety-belt shall be submitted by the holder of the trade mark or by his duly accredited representative. In the case of restraint systems, the application for approval of a type of restraint system shall be submitted by the holder of the trade mark or by his representative or by the manufacturer of the vehicle in which it is to be installed or by his representative. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

The application for approval of a type of safety-belt shall be submitted by the holder of the trade mark or by his duly accredited representative. In the case of restraint systems, the application for approval of a type of restraint system shall be submitted by the holder of the trade mark or by his representative or by the manufacturer of the vehicle in which it is to be installed or by his representative.

| 3.2.2. | It shall be accompanied by: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

It shall be accompanied by:

| 3.2.2.1. | A technical description of the belt type, specifying the straps and rigid parts used and accompanied by drawings of the parts making up the belt; the drawings must show the position intended for the approval number and the additional symbol(s) in relation to the circle of the approval mark. The description shall mention the colour of the model submitted for approval, and specify the vehicle type(s) for which this belt type is intended. In the case of retractors, installation instructions for the sensing device shall be provided; and for pre-loading devices or systems a full technical description of the construction and function including the sensing, if any, describing the method of activation and any necessary method to avoid inadvertent activation shall be provided. In the case of a restraint system the description shall include: drawings of the vehicle structure and of the seat structure, adjustment system and attachments on an appropriate scale showing the sites of the seat anchorages and belt anchorages and reinforcements in sufficient detail; together with a specification of the materials used which may affect the strength of the seat anchorages and belt anchorages; and a technical description of the seat anchorages and the belts anchorages; and a technical description of the seat anchorages and the belt anchorages. If the belt is designed to be fixed to the vehicle structure through a belt adjustment device for height, the technical description shall specify whether or not this device is considered as a part of the belt; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.1.

A technical description of the belt type, specifying the straps and rigid parts used and accompanied by drawings of the parts making up the belt; the drawings must show the position intended for the approval number and the additional symbol(s) in relation to the circle of the approval mark. The description shall mention the colour of the model submitted for approval, and specify the vehicle type(s) for which this belt type is intended. In the case of retractors, installation instructions for the sensing device shall be provided; and for pre-loading devices or systems a full technical description of the construction and function including the sensing, if any, describing the method of activation and any necessary method to avoid inadvertent activation shall be provided. In the case of a restraint system the description shall include: drawings of the vehicle structure and of the seat structure, adjustment system and attachments on an appropriate scale showing the sites of the seat anchorages and belt anchorages and reinforcements in sufficient detail; together with a specification of the materials used which may affect the strength of the seat anchorages and belt anchorages; and a technical description of the seat anchorages and the belts anchorages; and a technical description of the seat anchorages and the belt anchorages. If the belt is designed to be fixed to the vehicle structure through a belt adjustment device for height, the technical description shall specify whether or not this device is considered as a part of the belt;

| 3.2.2.2. | Six samples of the belt type, one of which is for reference purposes; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.2.

Six samples of the belt type, one of which is for reference purposes;

| 3.2.2.3. | A ten-metre length of each type of strap used in the type of belt; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.3.

A ten-metre length of each type of strap used in the type of belt;

| 3.2.2.4. | The technical service conducting the type-approval tests shall be entitled to request further samples. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.4.

The technical service conducting the type-approval tests shall be entitled to request further samples.

| 3.2.3. | In the case of restraint systems, two samples which may include two of the samples of belts required under paragraphs 3.2.2.2 and 3.2.2.3 at the option of the manufacturer, either a vehicle representative of the vehicle type to be approved, or the part or parts of the vehicle considered essential by the technical service conducting approval tests for testing the restraint system shall be submitted to the service. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

In the case of restraint systems, two samples which may include two of the samples of belts required under paragraphs 3.2.2.2 and 3.2.2.3 at the option of the manufacturer, either a vehicle representative of the vehicle type to be approved, or the part or parts of the vehicle considered essential by the technical service conducting approval tests for testing the restraint system shall be submitted to the service.

4.   MARKINGS

The samples of a belt type or type of restraint system submitted for approval in conformity with the provisions of paragraphs 3.2.2.2, 3.2.2.3 and 3.2.2.4 above shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the manufacturer's name, initials or trade name or mark.

5.   APPROVAL

| 5.1. | A certificate conforming to the model specified in paragraphs 5.1.1 or 5.1.2 shall be attached to the type approval certificate: |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

A certificate conforming to the model specified in paragraphs 5.1.1 or 5.1.2 shall be attached to the type approval certificate:

| 5.1.1. | Annex 1A for applications referred to in paragraph 3.1; |
| --- | --- |

5.1.1.

Annex 1A for applications referred to in paragraph 3.1;

| 5.1.2. | Annex 1B for applications referred to in paragraph 3.2; |
| --- | --- |

5.1.2.

Annex 1B for applications referred to in paragraph 3.2;

5.2.   Vehicle type

| 5.2.1. | If the vehicle submitted for approval pursuant this Regulation meets the requirements of paragraph 8 below, and of Annexes 15 and 16 to this Regulation, approval of that vehicle type shall be granted. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.

If the vehicle submitted for approval pursuant this Regulation meets the requirements of paragraph 8 below, and of Annexes 15 and 16 to this Regulation, approval of that vehicle type shall be granted.

| 5.2.2. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 04) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party shall not assign the same number to another vehicle type as defined in paragraph 2.16 above. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.2.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 04) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party shall not assign the same number to another vehicle type as defined in paragraph 2.16 above.

| 5.2.3. | Notice of approval or of extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1A to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.3.

Notice of approval or of extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1A to this Regulation.

| 5.2.4. | There shall be affixed, conspicuously and in a readily accessible place specified on the approval form, to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation an international approval mark consisting of: |
| --- | --- |

5.2.4.

There shall be affixed, conspicuously and in a readily accessible place specified on the approval form, to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation an international approval mark consisting of:

| 5.2.4.1. | a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (1); |
| --- | --- |

5.2.4.1.

a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (1

| 5.2.4.2. | the number of this Regulation, followed by the letter R, a dash and the approval number to the right of the circle prescribed in paragraph 5.2.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.4.2.

the number of this Regulation, followed by the letter R, a dash and the approval number to the right of the circle prescribed in paragraph 5.2.4.1.

| 5.2.5. | If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under one or more other Regulations annexed to the Agreement, in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation, the symbol prescribed in paragraph 5.2.4.1 need not be repeated; in such a case the additional numbers and symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation shall be placed in vertical columns to the right of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 5.2.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.5.

If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under one or more other Regulations annexed to the Agreement, in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation, the symbol prescribed in paragraph 5.2.4.1 need not be repeated; in such a case the additional numbers and symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation shall be placed in vertical columns to the right of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 5.2.4.1.

| 5.2.6. | The approval mark shall be clearly legible and be indelible. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.6.

The approval mark shall be clearly legible and be indelible.

| 5.2.7. | The approval mark shall be placed close to or on the vehicle data plate affixed by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.7.

The approval mark shall be placed close to or on the vehicle data plate affixed by the manufacturer.

5.3.   Safety-belt type

| 5.3.1. | If the samples of a type of belt which are submitted in conformity with the provisions of paragraph 3.2 above meet the requirements of paragraphs 4, 5.3 and 6 of this Regulation, approval shall be granted. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

If the samples of a type of belt which are submitted in conformity with the provisions of paragraph 3.2 above meet the requirements of paragraphs 4, 5.3 and 6 of this Regulation, approval shall be granted.

| 5.3.2. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 04 corresponding to the 04 series of amendments which entered into force on 22 December 1985) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of belt or restraint system. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 04 corresponding to the 04 series of amendments which entered into force on 22 December 1985) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of belt or restraint system.

| 5.3.3. | Notice of approval or of extension or refusal of approval of a type of belt or restraint system, pursuant to this Regulation, shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1B to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.3.

Notice of approval or of extension or refusal of approval of a type of belt or restraint system, pursuant to this Regulation, shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1B to this Regulation.

| 5.3.4. | In addition to the marks prescribed in paragraph 4 above, the following particulars shall be affixed in a suitable space to every belt conforming to a type approved under this Regulation: |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.

In addition to the marks prescribed in paragraph 4 above, the following particulars shall be affixed in a suitable space to every belt conforming to a type approved under this Regulation:

| 5.3.4.1. | An international approval mark consisting of: |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.1.

An international approval mark consisting of:

| 5.3.4.1.1. | a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (2); |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.1.1.

a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (2

| 5.3.4.1.2. | an approval number; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.1.2.

an approval number;

| 5.3.4.2. | The following additional symbol(s): |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.

The following additional symbol(s):

| 5.3.4.2.1. | The letter ‘A’ for a three-point belt, the letter ‘B’ for a lap belt and the letter ‘S’ for special-type belts. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.1.

The letter ‘A’ for a three-point belt, the letter ‘B’ for a lap belt and the letter ‘S’ for special-type belts.

| 5.3.4.2.2. | The symbols referred to in paragraph 5.3.4.2.1 above shall be supplemented by the following additional markings: |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.

The symbols referred to in paragraph 5.3.4.2.1 above shall be supplemented by the following additional markings:

| 5.3.4.2.2.1. | the letter ‘e’ for a belt with an energy absorption device; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.1.

the letter ‘e’ for a belt with an energy absorption device;

| 5.3.4.2.2.2. | the letter ‘r’ for a belt incorporating a retractor followed by the symbol (1, 2, 3, 4 or 4N) of the retractor used, in accordance with paragraph 2.14 of this Regulation, and the letter ‘m’ if the retractor used is an emergency locking retractor with multiple sensitivity; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.2.

the letter ‘r’ for a belt incorporating a retractor followed by the symbol (1, 2, 3, 4 or 4N) of the retractor used, in accordance with paragraph 2.14 of this Regulation, and the letter ‘m’ if the retractor used is an emergency locking retractor with multiple sensitivity;

| 5.3.4.2.2.3. | the letter ‘p’ in the case of safety-belts with a pre-loading device; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.3.

the letter ‘p’ in the case of safety-belts with a pre-loading device;

| 5.3.4.2.2.4. | the letter ‘t’ in the case of a safety-belt with a retractor incorporating a tension-reducing device; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.4.

the letter ‘t’ in the case of a safety-belt with a retractor incorporating a tension-reducing device;

| 5.3.4.2.2.5. | belts fitted with a type 4N retractor shall also bear a symbol consisting of a rectangle with a vehicle of category M1 crossed out, indicating that the use of this type of retractor is prohibited in vehicles of that category. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.5.

belts fitted with a type 4N retractor shall also bear a symbol consisting of a rectangle with a vehicle of category M1 crossed out, indicating that the use of this type of retractor is prohibited in vehicles of that category.

| 5.3.4.2.2.6. | If the safety-belt is approved following the provisions of paragraph 6.4.1.3.3 of this Regulation, it shall be marked with the word ‘AIRBAG’ in a rectangle. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.2.6.

If the safety-belt is approved following the provisions of paragraph 6.4.1.3.3 of this Regulation, it shall be marked with the word ‘AIRBAG’ in a rectangle.

| 5.3.4.2.3. | The symbol referred to in paragraph 5.3.4.2.1 above shall be preceded by the letter ‘Z’ when the safety-belt is part of a restraint system. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.2.3.

The symbol referred to in paragraph 5.3.4.2.1 above shall be preceded by the letter ‘Z’ when the safety-belt is part of a restraint system.

| 5.3.5. | Annex 2, paragraph 2 to this Regulation gives examples of arrangements of the approval mark. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.5.

Annex 2, paragraph 2 to this Regulation gives examples of arrangements of the approval mark.

| 5.3.6. | The particulars referred to in paragraph 5.3.4 above shall be clearly legible and be indelible, and may be permanently affixed either by means of a label or by direct marking. The label or marking shall be resistant to wear. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.6.

The particulars referred to in paragraph 5.3.4 above shall be clearly legible and be indelible, and may be permanently affixed either by means of a label or by direct marking. The label or marking shall be resistant to wear.

| 5.3.7. | The labels referred to in paragraph 5.3.6 above may be issued either by the authority which has granted the approval or, subject to that authority's authorization, by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.7.

The labels referred to in paragraph 5.3.6 above may be issued either by the authority which has granted the approval or, subject to that authority's authorization, by the manufacturer.

6.   SPECIFICATIONS

6.1.   General specifications

| 6.1.1. | Each sample submitted in conformity with paragraphs 3.2.2.2, 3.2.2.3 and 3.2.2.4 above shall meet the specifications set forth in paragraph 6 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.1.

Each sample submitted in conformity with paragraphs 3.2.2.2, 3.2.2.3 and 3.2.2.4 above shall meet the specifications set forth in paragraph 6 of this Regulation.

| 6.1.2. | The belt or the restraint system shall be so designed and constructed that, when correctly installed and properly used by an occupant, its satisfactory operation is assured and it reduces the risk of bodily injury in the event of an accident. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.

The belt or the restraint system shall be so designed and constructed that, when correctly installed and properly used by an occupant, its satisfactory operation is assured and it reduces the risk of bodily injury in the event of an accident.

| 6.1.3. | The straps of the belt shall not be liable to assume a dangerous configuration. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.3.

The straps of the belt shall not be liable to assume a dangerous configuration.

| 6.1.4. | The use of materials with properties of polyamide 6 as regards water retention is prohibited in all mechanical parts for which such a phenomenon is likely to have an adverse effect on their operation. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.4.

The use of materials with properties of polyamide 6 as regards water retention is prohibited in all mechanical parts for which such a phenomenon is likely to have an adverse effect on their operation.

6.2.   Rigid parts

6.2.1.   General

| 6.2.1.1. | The rigid parts of the safety-belt, such as buckles, adjusting devices, attachments and the like, shall not have sharp edges liable to cause wear or breakage of the straps by chafing. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1.1.

The rigid parts of the safety-belt, such as buckles, adjusting devices, attachments and the like, shall not have sharp edges liable to cause wear or breakage of the straps by chafing.

| 6.2.1.2. | All parts of the belt assembly liable to be affected by corrosion shall be suitably protected against it. After undergoing the corrosion test prescribed in paragraph 7.2, neither signs of deterioration likely to impair the proper functioning of the device nor any significant corrosion shall be visible to the unaided eye of a qualified observer. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1.2.

All parts of the belt assembly liable to be affected by corrosion shall be suitably protected against it. After undergoing the corrosion test prescribed in paragraph 7.2, neither signs of deterioration likely to impair the proper functioning of the device nor any significant corrosion shall be visible to the unaided eye of a qualified observer.

| 6.2.1.3. | Rigid parts intended to absorb energy or to be subjected to or to transmit a load shall not be fragile. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1.3.

Rigid parts intended to absorb energy or to be subjected to or to transmit a load shall not be fragile.

| 6.2.1.4. | The rigid items and parts made of plastics of a safety-belt must be so located and installed that they are not liable, during every day use of a power-driven vehicle, to become trapped under a moveable seat or in a door of that vehicle. If any of these items and parts do not comply with the above conditions, they shall be subjected to the cold impact test specified in paragraph 7.5.4 below. After the test, if any visible cracks are present in any plastic cover or retainer of rigid item, the complete plastic part shall then be removed and the remaining assembly shall then be assessed against its continued security. If the remaining assembly is still secure, or no visible cracks are present, it will then be further assessed against the test requirements specified in paragraphs 6.2.2, 6.2.3 and 6.4. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1.4.

The rigid items and parts made of plastics of a safety-belt must be so located and installed that they are not liable, during every day use of a power-driven vehicle, to become trapped under a moveable seat or in a door of that vehicle. If any of these items and parts do not comply with the above conditions, they shall be subjected to the cold impact test specified in paragraph 7.5.4 below. After the test, if any visible cracks are present in any plastic cover or retainer of rigid item, the complete plastic part shall then be removed and the remaining assembly shall then be assessed against its continued security. If the remaining assembly is still secure, or no visible cracks are present, it will then be further assessed against the test requirements specified in paragraphs 6.2.2, 6.2.3 and 6.4.

6.2.2   Buckle

| 6.2.2.1. | The buckle shall be so designed as to preclude any possibility of incorrect use. This means, inter alia, that it must not be possible for the buckle to be left in a partially-closed condition. The procedure for opening the buckle must be evident. The parts of the buckle likely to contact the body of the wearer shall present a section of not less than 20 cm2 and at least 46 mm in width, measured in a plane situated at a maximal distance of 2,5 mm from the contact surface. In the case of harness belt buckles, the latter requirement shall be regarded as satisfied if the contact area of the buckle with the wearer's body is comprised between 20 and 40 cm2. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.1.

The buckle shall be so designed as to preclude any possibility of incorrect use. This means, inter alia

2

2

| 6.2.2.2. | The buckle, even when not under tension, shall remain closed whatever the position of the vehicle. It shall not be possible to release the buckle inadvertently, accidentally or with a force of less than 1 daN. The buckle shall be easy to use and to grasp; when it is not under tension and when under the tension specified in paragraph 7.8.2 below, it shall be capable of being released by the wearer with a single simple movement of one hand in one direction; in addition, in the case of belt assemblies intended to be used for the front outboard seats, except in these harness belts, it shall also be capable of being engaged by the wearer with a simple movement of one hand in one direction. The buckle shall be released by pressing either a button or a similar device. The surface to which this pressure is applied shall have the following dimensions, with the button in the actual release position and when projected into a plane perpendicular to the button's initial direction of motion: for enclosed buttons, an area of not less than 4,5 cm2 and a width of not less than 15 mm; for non-enclosed buttons, an area of not less than 2,5 cm2 and a width of not less than 10 mm. The buckle release area shall be coloured red. No other part of the buckle shall be of this colour. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.2.

The buckle, even when not under tension, shall remain closed whatever the position of the vehicle. It shall not be possible to release the buckle inadvertently, accidentally or with a force of less than 1 daN. The buckle shall be easy to use and to grasp; when it is not under tension and when under the tension specified in paragraph 7.8.2 below, it shall be capable of being released by the wearer with a single simple movement of one hand in one direction; in addition, in the case of belt assemblies intended to be used for the front outboard seats, except in these harness belts, it shall also be capable of being engaged by the wearer with a simple movement of one hand in one direction. The buckle shall be released by pressing either a button or a similar device. The surface to which this pressure is applied shall have the following dimensions, with the button in the actual release position and when projected into a plane perpendicular to the button's initial direction of motion: for enclosed buttons, an area of not less than 4,5 cm2

2

| 6.2.2.3. | The buckle, when tested in accordance with paragraph 7.5.3 below, shall operate normally. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.3.

The buckle, when tested in accordance with paragraph 7.5.3 below, shall operate normally.

| 6.2.2.4. | The buckle shall be capable of withstanding repeated operation and, prior to the dynamic test specified in paragraph 7.7 shall undergo 5 000 opening and closing cycles under normal conditions of use. In the case of harness belt buckles, this test may be carried out without all the tongues being introduced. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.4.

The buckle shall be capable of withstanding repeated operation and, prior to the dynamic test specified in paragraph 7.7 shall undergo 5 000 opening and closing cycles under normal conditions of use. In the case of harness belt buckles, this test may be carried out without all the tongues being introduced.

| 6.2.2.5. | The force required to open the buckle in the test as prescribed in paragraph 7.8 below shall not exceed 6 daN. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.5.

The force required to open the buckle in the test as prescribed in paragraph 7.8 below shall not exceed 6 daN.

| 6.2.2.6. | The buckle shall be tested for strength as prescribed in paragraphs 7.5.1 and, where appropriate, 7.5.5. It must not break, be seriously distorted or become detached under the tension set up by the prescribed load. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.6.

The buckle shall be tested for strength as prescribed in paragraphs 7.5.1 and, where appropriate, 7.5.5. It must not break, be seriously distorted or become detached under the tension set up by the prescribed load.

| 6.2.2.7. | In the case of buckles which incorporate a component common to two assemblies, the strength and release tests of paragraphs 7.7 and 7.8 shall also be carried out with the part of the buckle pertaining to one assembly being engaged in the mating part pertaining to the other, if it is possible for the buckle to be so assembled in use. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.7.

In the case of buckles which incorporate a component common to two assemblies, the strength and release tests of paragraphs 7.7 and 7.8 shall also be carried out with the part of the buckle pertaining to one assembly being engaged in the mating part pertaining to the other, if it is possible for the buckle to be so assembled in use.

6.2.3.   Belt adjusting device

| 6.2.3.1. | The belt after being put on by the wearer, shall either adjust automatically to fit him or be such that the manually adjusting device shall be readily accessible to the seated wearer and shall be convenient and easy to use. It shall also allow the belt to be tightened with one hand to suit the wearer's body size and the position of the vehicle seat. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3.1.

The belt after being put on by the wearer, shall either adjust automatically to fit him or be such that the manually adjusting device shall be readily accessible to the seated wearer and shall be convenient and easy to use. It shall also allow the belt to be tightened with one hand to suit the wearer's body size and the position of the vehicle seat.

| 6.2.3.2. | Two samples of each belt adjusting device shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 7.3. The strap slip shall not exceed 25 mm for each sample of adjusting device and the sum of shifts for all the adjusting devices shall not exceed 40 mm. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3.2.

Two samples of each belt adjusting device shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 7.3. The strap slip shall not exceed 25 mm for each sample of adjusting device and the sum of shifts for all the adjusting devices shall not exceed 40 mm.

| 6.2.3.3. | All the adjustment devices shall be tested for strength as prescribed in paragraph 7.5.1. They must not break or become detached under the tension set up by the prescribed load. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3.3.

All the adjustment devices shall be tested for strength as prescribed in paragraph 7.5.1. They must not break or become detached under the tension set up by the prescribed load.

| 6.2.3.4. | When tested in accordance with paragraph 7.5.6, the force required to operate any manually adjusting device shall not exceed 5 daN. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3.4.

When tested in accordance with paragraph 7.5.6, the force required to operate any manually adjusting device shall not exceed 5 daN.

6.2.4.   Attachments and belt adjustment devices for height

The attachments shall be tested for strength as prescribed in paragraphs 7.5.1 and 7.5.2. The actual belt adjustment devices for height shall be tested for strength as prescribed in paragraph 7.5.2 of this Regulation where they have not been tested on the vehicle in application of Regulation No 14 (in its last version of amendments) relative to anchorages of safety-belts. These parts must not break or become detached under the tension set up by the prescribed load.

6.2.5.   Retractors

Retractors shall be subjected to tests and shall fulfil the requirements specified below, including the tests for strength prescribed in paragraphs 7.5.1 and 7.5.2. (These requirements are such that they exclude non-locking retractors.)

6.2.5.1.   Manually unlocking retractors

Manually unlocking retractors

| 6.2.5.1.1. | The strap of a safety-belt assembly equipped with a manually unlocking retractor shall not move more than 25 mm between locking positions of the reactor. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.1.1.

The strap of a safety-belt assembly equipped with a manually unlocking retractor shall not move more than 25 mm between locking positions of the reactor.

| 6.2.5.1.2. | The strap of a safety-belt assembly shall extract from a manually unlocking retractor within 6 mm of its maximum length when a tension of not less than 1,4 daN and not more than2,2 daN is applied to the strap in the normal direction of pull. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.1.2.

The strap of a safety-belt assembly shall extract from a manually unlocking retractor within 6 mm of its maximum length when a tension of not less than 1,4 daN and not more than2,2 daN is applied to the strap in the normal direction of pull.

| 6.2.5.1.3. | The strap shall be withdrawn from the retractor, and allowed to retract repeatedly by the method described in paragraph 7.6.1 until 5 000 cycles have been completed. The retractor shall then be subjected to the corrosion test given in paragraph 7.2 and to the dust test given in paragraph 7.6.3. It shall then satisfactorily complete a further 5 000 cycles of withdrawal and retraction. After the above tests, the retractor shall operate correctly and still meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.1.1 and 6.2.5.1.2 above. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.1.3.

The strap shall be withdrawn from the retractor, and allowed to retract repeatedly by the method described in paragraph 7.6.1 until 5 000 cycles have been completed. The retractor shall then be subjected to the corrosion test given in paragraph 7.2 and to the dust test given in paragraph 7.6.3. It shall then satisfactorily complete a further 5 000 cycles of withdrawal and retraction. After the above tests, the retractor shall operate correctly and still meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.1.1 and 6.2.5.1.2 above.

6.2.5.2.   Automatically locking retractors

Automatically locking retractors

| 6.2.5.2.1. | The strap of a safety-belt assembly equipped with an automatically locking retractor shall not move more than 30 mm between locking positions of the retractor. After a rearward movement of the wearer, the belt must either remain at its initial position or return to that position automatically on subsequent forward movements of the wearer. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.2.1.

The strap of a safety-belt assembly equipped with an automatically locking retractor shall not move more than 30 mm between locking positions of the retractor. After a rearward movement of the wearer, the belt must either remain at its initial position or return to that position automatically on subsequent forward movements of the wearer.

| 6.2.5.2.2. | If the retractor is part of a lap belt, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,7 daN when measured in the free length between the dummy and the retractor in accordance with paragraph 7.6.4.
  If the retractor is part of an upper torso restraint, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,1 daN and not more than 0,7 daN when similarly measured. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.2.2.

If the retractor is part of a lap belt, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,7 daN when measured in the free length between the dummy and the retractor in accordance with paragraph 7.6.4.

If the retractor is part of an upper torso restraint, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,1 daN and not more than 0,7 daN when similarly measured.

| 6.2.5.2.3. | The strap shall be withdrawn from the retractor and allowed to retract repeatedly by the method described in paragraph 7.6.1 until 5 000 cycles have been completed. The retractor shall then be subjected to the corrosion test given in paragraph 7.2 and after that to the dust test given in paragraph 7.6.3. It shall then satisfactorily complete a further 5 000 cycles of withdrawal and retraction. After the above tests the retractor shall operate correctly and still meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.2.1 and 6.2.5.2.2 above. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.2.3.

The strap shall be withdrawn from the retractor and allowed to retract repeatedly by the method described in paragraph 7.6.1 until 5 000 cycles have been completed. The retractor shall then be subjected to the corrosion test given in paragraph 7.2 and after that to the dust test given in paragraph 7.6.3. It shall then satisfactorily complete a further 5 000 cycles of withdrawal and retraction. After the above tests the retractor shall operate correctly and still meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.2.1 and 6.2.5.2.2 above.

6.2.5.3.   Emergency locking retractors

Emergency locking retractors

| 6.2.5.3.1. | An emergency locking retractor, when tested in accordance with paragraph 7.6.2, shall satisfy the conditions below. In the case of a single sensitivity, according to paragraph 2.14.4.1, only the specifications regarding deceleration of the vehicle are valid. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.1.

An emergency locking retractor, when tested in accordance with paragraph 7.6.2, shall satisfy the conditions below. In the case of a single sensitivity, according to paragraph 2.14.4.1, only the specifications regarding deceleration of the vehicle are valid.

| 6.2.5.3.1.1. | The locking must have occurred when the deceleration of the vehicle reaches 0,45 g (3) in the case of type 4 or 0,85 g in the case of type 4N retractors. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.1.1.

The locking must have occurred when the deceleration of the vehicle reaches 0,45 g (3

| 6.2.5.3.1.2. | It must not lock for values of acceleration of the strap measured in the direction of the extraction of the strap of less than 0,8 g in the case of type 4 or less than 1,0 g in the case of type 4N retractors. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.1.2.

It must not lock for values of acceleration of the strap measured in the direction of the extraction of the strap of less than 0,8 g in the case of type 4 or less than 1,0 g in the case of type 4N retractors.

| 6.2.5.3.1.3. | It must not lock when its sensing device is tilted 12o or less in any direction from the installation position specified by its manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.1.3.

It must not lock when its sensing device is tilted 12o

| 6.2.5.3.1.4. | It shall lock when its sensing device is tilted by more than 27o in the case of type 4 or 40o in the case of type 4N retractors in any direction from the installation position specified by its manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.1.4.

It shall lock when its sensing device is tilted by more than 27o

o

| 6.2.5.3.1.5. | In cases where the operation of a retractor depends on an external signal or power source, the design shall ensure that the retractor locks automatically upon failure or interruption of that signal or power source. However, this requirement need not be met in the case of a retractor with multiple sensitivities, provided only one sensitivity is dependent on an external signal or power source and the failure of the signal or power source is indicated to the driver by optical and/or acoustical means. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.1.5.

In cases where the operation of a retractor depends on an external signal or power source, the design shall ensure that the retractor locks automatically upon failure or interruption of that signal or power source. However, this requirement need not be met in the case of a retractor with multiple sensitivities, provided only one sensitivity is dependent on an external signal or power source and the failure of the signal or power source is indicated to the driver by optical and/or acoustical means.

| 6.2.5.3.2. | When tested in accordance with paragraph 7.6.2, an emergency locking retractor with multiple sensitivity, including strap sensitivity, shall comply with the specified requirements and also lock up when strap acceleration measured in the direction of unreeling is not less than 2,0 g. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.2.

When tested in accordance with paragraph 7.6.2, an emergency locking retractor with multiple sensitivity, including strap sensitivity, shall comply with the specified requirements and also lock up when strap acceleration measured in the direction of unreeling is not less than 2,0 g.

| 6.2.5.3.3. | In the case of the tests mentioned in paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1 and 6.2.5.3.2 above the amount of strap movement which may occur before the retractor locks shall not exceed 50 mm starting at the length given in paragraph 7.6.2.1. In the case of the test mentioned in paragraph 6.2.5.3.1.2 above locking must not occur during the 50 mm of strap movement starting at the length given in paragraph 7.6.2.1. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.3.

In the case of the tests mentioned in paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1 and 6.2.5.3.2 above the amount of strap movement which may occur before the retractor locks shall not exceed 50 mm starting at the length given in paragraph 7.6.2.1. In the case of the test mentioned in paragraph 6.2.5.3.1.2 above locking must not occur during the 50 mm of strap movement starting at the length given in paragraph 7.6.2.1.

| 6.2.5.3.4. | If the retractor is part of a lap belt, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,7 daN when measured in the free length between the dummy and the retractor in accordance with paragraph 7.6.4.
  If the retractor is part of an upper torso restraint, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,1 daN and not more than 0,7 daN when similarly measured, except for a belt equipped with a tension-reducing device, in which case the minimum retracting force may be reduced to 0,05 daN only when such a device is in operation mode. If the strap passes through a guide or pulley, the retracting force shall be measured in the free length between the dummy and the guide or pulley.
  If the assembly incorporates a device that upon manual or automatic operation prevents the strap from being completely retracted, such a device shall not be operated when these requirements are assessed.
  If the assembly incorporates a tension-reducing device, the retracting force of the strap described in the above shall be measured with the device in operation mode and non-operation mode when these requirements are assessed before and after durability tests according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.5. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.4.

If the retractor is part of a lap belt, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,7 daN when measured in the free length between the dummy and the retractor in accordance with paragraph 7.6.4.

If the retractor is part of an upper torso restraint, the retracting force of the strap shall be not less than 0,1 daN and not more than 0,7 daN when similarly measured, except for a belt equipped with a tension-reducing device, in which case the minimum retracting force may be reduced to 0,05 daN only when such a device is in operation mode. If the strap passes through a guide or pulley, the retracting force shall be measured in the free length between the dummy and the guide or pulley.

If the assembly incorporates a device that upon manual or automatic operation prevents the strap from being completely retracted, such a device shall not be operated when these requirements are assessed.

If the assembly incorporates a tension-reducing device, the retracting force of the strap described in the above shall be measured with the device in operation mode and non-operation mode when these requirements are assessed before and after durability tests according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.5.

| 6.2.5.3.5. | The strap shall be withdrawn from the retractor and allowed to retract repeatedly by the method described in paragraph 7.6.1 until 40 000 cycles have been completed. The retractor shall then be subjected to the corrosion test given in paragraph 7.2 and after that to the dust test prescribed in paragraph 7.6.3. It shall then satisfactorily complete a further 5 000 cycles (making 45 000 in all).
  If the assembly incorporates a tension-reducing device, the above tests shall be conducted on condition that the tension-reducing device is in operation mode and in non-operation mode.
  After the above tests, the retractor shall operate correctly and still meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1, 6.2.5.3.3 and 6.2.5.3.4 above. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.3.5.

The strap shall be withdrawn from the retractor and allowed to retract repeatedly by the method described in paragraph 7.6.1 until 40 000 cycles have been completed. The retractor shall then be subjected to the corrosion test given in paragraph 7.2 and after that to the dust test prescribed in paragraph 7.6.3. It shall then satisfactorily complete a further 5 000 cycles (making 45 000 in all).

If the assembly incorporates a tension-reducing device, the above tests shall be conducted on condition that the tension-reducing device is in operation mode and in non-operation mode.

After the above tests, the retractor shall operate correctly and still meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1, 6.2.5.3.3 and 6.2.5.3.4 above.

| 6.2.5.4. | Retractors must fulfill, after durability test according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.5, and immediately after the retracting force measurement according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.4, all next two specifications: |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.4.

Retractors must fulfill, after durability test according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.5, and immediately after the retracting force measurement according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.4, all next two specifications:

| 6.2.5.4.1. | When retractors except automatically locking retractors are tested according to paragraph 7.6.4.2, the retractors must be able to avoid any slack between torso and belt, and, |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.4.1.

When retractors except automatically locking retractors are tested according to paragraph 7.6.4.2, the retractors must be able to avoid any slack between torso and belt, and,

| 6.2.5.4.2. | When the buckle is unlatched to release the tongue, the retractor alone must be able to retract strap fully. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.4.2.

When the buckle is unlatched to release the tongue, the retractor alone must be able to retract strap fully.

6.2.6.   Pre-loading device

| 6.2.6.1. | After being submitted to corrosion testing in accordance with paragraph 7.2, the pre-loading device (including the impact sensor connected to the device by the original plugs but without any current passing through them) shall operate normally. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.6.1.

After being submitted to corrosion testing in accordance with paragraph 7.2, the pre-loading device (including the impact sensor connected to the device by the original plugs but without any current passing through them) shall operate normally.

| 6.2.6.2. | It shall be verified that inadvertent operation of the device does not involve any risk of bodily injury for wearer. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.6.2.

It shall be verified that inadvertent operation of the device does not involve any risk of bodily injury for wearer.

| 6.2.6.3. | In the case of pyrotechnic pre-loading devices: |
| --- | --- |

6.2.6.3.

In the case of pyrotechnic pre-loading devices:

| 6.2.6.3.1. | After being submitted to conditioning in accordance with paragraph 7.9.2, operation of the pre-loading device must not have been activated by temperature and the device shall operate normally. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.6.3.1.

After being submitted to conditioning in accordance with paragraph 7.9.2, operation of the pre-loading device must not have been activated by temperature and the device shall operate normally.

| 6.2.6.3.2. | Precautions shall be taken to prevent the hot gases expelled from igniting adjacent flammable materials. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.6.3.2.

Precautions shall be taken to prevent the hot gases expelled from igniting adjacent flammable materials.

6.3.   Straps

6.3.1.   General

| 6.3.1.1. | The characteristics of the straps shall be such as to ensure that their pressure on the wearer's body is distributed as evenly as possible over their width and that they do not twist even under tension. They shall have energy-absorbing and energy-dispersing capacities. The straps shall have finished selvages which shall not become unravelled in use. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.1.1.

The characteristics of the straps shall be such as to ensure that their pressure on the wearer's body is distributed as evenly as possible over their width and that they do not twist even under tension. They shall have energy-absorbing and energy-dispersing capacities. The straps shall have finished selvages which shall not become unravelled in use.

| 6.3.1.2. | The width of the strap under load of 980 daN shall be not less than 46 mm. This dimension shall be measured during the breaking-strength test prescribed in paragraph 7.4.2 and without stopping the machine. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.1.2.

The width of the strap under load of 980 daN shall be not less than 46 mm. This dimension shall be measured during the breaking-strength test prescribed in paragraph 7.4.2 and without stopping the machine.

6.3.2.   Strength after room-conditioning

In the case of the two straps samples conditioned in conformity with paragraph 7.4.1.1 the breaking load of the strap, determined as prescribed in paragraph 7.4.2 below, shall be not less than 1 470 daN. The difference between the breaking loads of the two samples shall not exceed 10 per cent of the greater of the breaking loads measured.

6.3.3.   Strength after special conditioning

In the case of the two strap samples conditioned in conformity with one of the provisions of paragraph 7.4.1 (except 7.4.1.1) below, the breaking load of the strap shall be not less than 75 per cent of average of the loads determined in the test referred to in paragraph 6.3.2 and not less than 1 470 daN. The technical service conducting the tests may dispense with one or more of these tests if the composition of the material used or information already available renders the test or tests superfluous.

6.4.   Belt assembly or restraint system

6.4.1.   Dynamic test

| 6.4.1.1. | The belt assembly or restraint system shall be subjected to a dynamic test in conformity with paragraph 7.7 below. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.1.

The belt assembly or restraint system shall be subjected to a dynamic test in conformity with paragraph 7.7 below.

| 6.4.1.2. | The dynamic test shall be performed on two belt assemblies which have not previously been under load, except in the case of belt assemblies forming part of restraint systems when the dynamic test shall be performed on the restraint systems intended for one group of seats which have not previously been under load. The buckles of the belt assemblies to be tested shall have met the requirements of paragraph 6.2.2.4 above. In the case of safety-belts with retractors, the retractor shall have been subjected to the dust resistance test laid down in paragraph 7.6.3; in addition, in the case of safety-belts or restraint systems equipped with a pre-loading device comprising pyrotechnic means, the device shall have been subjected to the conditioning specified in paragraph 7.9.2. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.2.

The dynamic test shall be performed on two belt assemblies which have not previously been under load, except in the case of belt assemblies forming part of restraint systems when the dynamic test shall be performed on the restraint systems intended for one group of seats which have not previously been under load. The buckles of the belt assemblies to be tested shall have met the requirements of paragraph 6.2.2.4 above. In the case of safety-belts with retractors, the retractor shall have been subjected to the dust resistance test laid down in paragraph 7.6.3; in addition, in the case of safety-belts or restraint systems equipped with a pre-loading device comprising pyrotechnic means, the device shall have been subjected to the conditioning specified in paragraph 7.9.2.

| 6.4.1.2.1. | The belts shall have undergone the corrosion test described in paragraph 7.2, after which the buckles shall be subjected to 500 additional opening and closing cycles under normal conditions of use. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.2.1.

The belts shall have undergone the corrosion test described in paragraph 7.2, after which the buckles shall be subjected to 500 additional opening and closing cycles under normal conditions of use.

| 6.4.1.2.2. | Safety-belts with retractors shall have been subjected either to the tests described in paragraph 6.2.5.2 or to those described in paragraph 6.2.5.3. If, however, a retractor has already been subjected to the corrosion test in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 6.4.1.2.1, above, this test need not be repeated. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.2.2.

Safety-belts with retractors shall have been subjected either to the tests described in paragraph 6.2.5.2 or to those described in paragraph 6.2.5.3. If, however, a retractor has already been subjected to the corrosion test in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 6.4.1.2.1, above, this test need not be repeated.

| 6.4.1.2.3. | In the case of a belt intended for use with a belt adjustment device for height, as defined in paragraph 2.9.6 above, the test shall be carried out with the device adjusted in the most unfavourable position(s) chosen by the technical service responsible for testing. However, if the belt adjustment device for height is constituted by the belt anchorage, as approved in accordance with the provisions of Regulation No 14, the technical service responsible for testing may, at its discretion, apply the provisions of paragraph 7.7.1 below. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.2.3.

In the case of a belt intended for use with a belt adjustment device for height, as defined in paragraph 2.9.6 above, the test shall be carried out with the device adjusted in the most unfavourable position(s) chosen by the technical service responsible for testing. However, if the belt adjustment device for height is constituted by the belt anchorage, as approved in accordance with the provisions of Regulation No 14, the technical service responsible for testing may, at its discretion, apply the provisions of paragraph 7.7.1 below.

| 6.4.1.2.4. | In the case of safety-belt with a preloading device the minimum displacement specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 below may be reduced by half. For the purpose of this test, the preloading device shall be in operation. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.2.4.

In the case of safety-belt with a preloading device the minimum displacement specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 below may be reduced by half. For the purpose of this test, the preloading device shall be in operation.

| 6.4.1.2.5. | In the case of a safety-belt with tension-reducing device, it shall be subjected to a durability test with such a device in operation mode according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.5 before a dynamic test. The dynamic test shall then be conducted with the tension-reducing device in operation mode. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.2.5.

In the case of a safety-belt with tension-reducing device, it shall be subjected to a durability test with such a device in operation mode according to paragraph 6.2.5.3.5 before a dynamic test. The dynamic test shall then be conducted with the tension-reducing device in operation mode.

| 6.4.1.3. | During this test, the following requirements shall be met: |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.3.

During this test, the following requirements shall be met:

| 6.4.1.3.1. | No part of the belt assembly or a restraint system affecting the restraint of the occupant shall break and no buckles or locking system or displacement system shall release or unlock; and |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.3.1.

No part of the belt assembly or a restraint system affecting the restraint of the occupant shall break and no buckles or locking system or displacement system shall release or unlock; and

| 6.4.1.3.2. | the forward displacement of the manikin shall be between 80 and 200 mm at pelvic level in the case of lap belts. In the case of other types of belts, the forward displacement shall be between 80 and 200 mm at pelvic level and between 100 and 300 mm at chest level. In the case of a harness belt, the minimum displacements specified above may be reduced by half. These displacements are the displacements in relation to the measurement points shown in Annex 7, figure 6 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.3.2.

the forward displacement of the manikin shall be between 80 and 200 mm at pelvic level in the case of lap belts. In the case of other types of belts, the forward displacement shall be between 80 and 200 mm at pelvic level and between 100 and 300 mm at chest level. In the case of a harness belt, the minimum displacements specified above may be reduced by half. These displacements are the displacements in relation to the measurement points shown in Annex 7, figure 6 to this Regulation.

| 6.4.1.3.3. | In the case of a safety-belt intended to be used in an outboard front seating position protected by an airbag in front of it, the displacement of the chest reference point may exceed that specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 above if its speed at this value does not exceed 24 km/h. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.3.3.

In the case of a safety-belt intended to be used in an outboard front seating position protected by an airbag in front of it, the displacement of the chest reference point may exceed that specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 above if its speed at this value does not exceed 24 km/h.

| 6.4.1.4. | In the case of a restraint system: |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.4.

In the case of a restraint system:

| 6.4.1.4.1. | The movement of the chest reference point may exceed that specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 above if it can be shown either by calculation or a further test that no part of the torso or the head of the manikin used in the dynamic test would have come into contact with any forward rigid part of the vehicle other than the chest with the steering assembly, if the latter meets the requirements of Regulation No 12 and provided contact does not occur at a speed higher than 24 km/h. For this assessment the seat shall be considered to be in the position specified in paragraph 7.7.1.5 below. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.4.1.

The movement of the chest reference point may exceed that specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 above if it can be shown either by calculation or a further test that no part of the torso or the head of the manikin used in the dynamic test would have come into contact with any forward rigid part of the vehicle other than the chest with the steering assembly, if the latter meets the requirements of Regulation No 12 and provided contact does not occur at a speed higher than 24 km/h. For this assessment the seat shall be considered to be in the position specified in paragraph 7.7.1.5 below.

| 6.4.1.4.2. | In vehicles where such devices are used, the displacement and locking systems enabling the occupants of all seats to leave the vehicle shall still be operable by hand after the dynamic test. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.4.2.

In vehicles where such devices are used, the displacement and locking systems enabling the occupants of all seats to leave the vehicle shall still be operable by hand after the dynamic test.

| 6.4.1.5. | By way of derogation, in case of a restraint system, the displacements may be greater than those specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 in the case where the upper anchorage fitted to the seat profits from the derogation provided in Regulation No 14, paragraph 7.4. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.5.

By way of derogation, in case of a restraint system, the displacements may be greater than those specified in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 in the case where the upper anchorage fitted to the seat profits from the derogation provided in Regulation No 14, paragraph 7.4.

6.4.2.   Strength after abrasion conditioning

| 6.4.2.1. | For both samples conditioned in compliance with paragraph 7.4.1.6 below, the breaking strength shall be assessed as prescribed in paragraphs 7.4.2 and 7.5. below. It must be at least equal to 75 per cent of the breaking strength average determined during tests on unabraded straps and not less than the minimum load specified for the item being tested. Difference between breaking strength of the two samples must not exceed 20 per cent of the highest measured breaking strength. For type 1 and type 2 procedures, the breaking strength test shall be carried out on strap samples only (paragraph 7.4.2). For type 3 procedure, the breaking strength test shall be carried out on the strap in combination with the metal component involved (paragraph 7.5). |
| --- | --- |

6.4.2.1.

For both samples conditioned in compliance with paragraph 7.4.1.6 below, the breaking strength shall be assessed as prescribed in paragraphs 7.4.2 and 7.5. below. It must be at least equal to 75 per cent of the breaking strength average determined during tests on unabraded straps and not less than the minimum load specified for the item being tested. Difference between breaking strength of the two samples must not exceed 20 per cent of the highest measured breaking strength. For type 1 and type 2 procedures, the breaking strength test shall be carried out on strap samples only (paragraph 7.4.2). For type 3 procedure, the breaking strength test shall be carried out on the strap in combination with the metal component involved (paragraph 7.5).

| 6.4.2.2. | The parts of the belt assembly to be subjected to an abrasion procedure are given in the following table and the procedure types which may be appropriate for them are indicated by ‘x’. A new sample shall be used for each procedure. | Procedure 1 | Procedure 2 | Procedure 3 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Attachment | — | — | x |
| Guide or pulley | — | x | — |
| Buckle-loop | — | x | x |
| Adjusting device | x | — | x |
| Parts sewn to the strap | — | — | x |

6.4.2.2.

The parts of the belt assembly to be subjected to an abrasion procedure are given in the following table and the procedure types which may be appropriate for them are indicated by ‘x’. A new sample shall be used for each procedure.

Procedure 1

Procedure 2

Procedure 3

Attachment

—

—

x

Guide or pulley

—

x

—

Buckle-loop

—

x

x

Adjusting device

x

—

x

Parts sewn to the strap

—

—

x

7.   TESTS

7.1.   Use of samples submitted for approval of a type of belt or restraint system (see Annex 13 to this Regulation)

| 7.1.1. | Two belts or restraint systems are required for the buckle inspection, the low-temperature buckle test, the low-temperature test described in paragraph 7.5.4 below where necessary, the buckle durability test, the belt corrosion test, the retractor operating tests, the dynamic test and the buckle-opening test after the dynamic test. One of these two samples shall be used for the inspection of the belt or restraint system. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1.

Two belts or restraint systems are required for the buckle inspection, the low-temperature buckle test, the low-temperature test described in paragraph 7.5.4 below where necessary, the buckle durability test, the belt corrosion test, the retractor operating tests, the dynamic test and the buckle-opening test after the dynamic test. One of these two samples shall be used for the inspection of the belt or restraint system.

| 7.1.2. | One belt or restraint system is required for the inspection of the buckle and the strength test on the buckle, the attachment mountings, the belt adjusting devices and, where necessary, the retractors. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.

One belt or restraint system is required for the inspection of the buckle and the strength test on the buckle, the attachment mountings, the belt adjusting devices and, where necessary, the retractors.

| 7.1.3. | Two belts or restraint systems are required for the inspection of the buckle, the micro-slip test and the abrasion test. The belt adjusting device operating test shall be conducted on one of these two samples. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.

Two belts or restraint systems are required for the inspection of the buckle, the micro-slip test and the abrasion test. The belt adjusting device operating test shall be conducted on one of these two samples.

| 7.1.4. | The sample of strap shall be used for testing the breaking strength of the strap. Part of this sample shall be preserved so long as the approval remains valid. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.

The sample of strap shall be used for testing the breaking strength of the strap. Part of this sample shall be preserved so long as the approval remains valid.

7.2.   Corrosion test

| 7.2.1. | A complete safety-belt assembly shall be positioned in a test chamber as prescribed in Annex 12 to this Regulation. In the case of an assembly incorporating a retractor, the strap shall be unwound to full length less 300 ± 3 mm. Except for short interruptions that may be necessary, for example, to check and replenish the salt solution, the exposure test shall proceed continuously for a period of 50 hours. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.1.

A complete safety-belt assembly shall be positioned in a test chamber as prescribed in Annex 12 to this Regulation. In the case of an assembly incorporating a retractor, the strap shall be unwound to full length less 300 ± 3 mm. Except for short interruptions that may be necessary, for example, to check and replenish the salt solution, the exposure test shall proceed continuously for a period of 50 hours.

| 7.2.2. | On completion of the exposure test the assembly shall be gently washed, or dipped in clean running water with a temperature not higher than 38 oC to remove any salt deposit that may have formed and then allowed to dry at room temperature for 24 hours before inspection in accordance with paragraph 6.2.1.2 above. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.2.

On completion of the exposure test the assembly shall be gently washed, or dipped in clean running water with a temperature not higher than 38 o

7.3.   Micro-slip test (see Annex 11, Figure 3 to this Regulation)

| 7.3.1. | The samples to be submitted to the micro-slip test shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 oC and a relative humidity of 65 ± 5 per cent. The test shall be carried out at a temperature between 15 and 30 oC. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.1.

The samples to be submitted to the micro-slip test shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 o

o

| 7.3.2. | It shall be ensured that the free section of the adjusting device points either up or down on the test bench, as in the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.2.

It shall be ensured that the free section of the adjusting device points either up or down on the test bench, as in the vehicle.

| 7.3.3. | A 5 daN load shall be attached to the lower end of the section of strap. The other end shall be subjected to a back and forth motion, the total amplitude being 300 ± 20 mm (see figure). |
| --- | --- |

7.3.3.

A 5 daN load shall be attached to the lower end of the section of strap. The other end shall be subjected to a back and forth motion, the total amplitude being 300 ± 20 mm (see figure).

| 7.3.4. | If there is a free end serving as reserve strap, it must in no way be fastened or clipped to the section under load. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.4.

If there is a free end serving as reserve strap, it must in no way be fastened or clipped to the section under load.

| 7.3.5. | It shall be ensured that on the test bench the strap, in the slack position, descends in a concave curve from the adjusting device, as in the vehicle. The 5 daN load applied on the test bench shall be guided vertically in such a way as to prevent the load swaying and the belt twisting. The attachment shall be fixed to the 5 daN load as in the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.5.

It shall be ensured that on the test bench the strap, in the slack position, descends in a concave curve from the adjusting device, as in the vehicle. The 5 daN load applied on the test bench shall be guided vertically in such a way as to prevent the load swaying and the belt twisting. The attachment shall be fixed to the 5 daN load as in the vehicle.

| 7.3.6. | Before the actual start of the test, a series of 20 cycles shall be completed so that the self-tightening system settles properly. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.6.

Before the actual start of the test, a series of 20 cycles shall be completed so that the self-tightening system settles properly.

| 7.3.7. | 1 000 cycles shall be completed at a frequency of 0,5 cycles per second, the total amplitude being 300 ± 20 mm. The 5 daN load shall be applied only during the time corresponding to a shift of 100 ± 20 mm for each half period. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.7.

1 000 cycles shall be completed at a frequency of 0,5 cycles per second, the total amplitude being 300 ± 20 mm. The 5 daN load shall be applied only during the time corresponding to a shift of 100 ± 20 mm for each half period.

7.4.   Conditioning of straps and breaking-strength test (static)

7.4.1.   Conditioning of straps for the breaking-strength test

Samples cut from the strap referred to in paragraph 3.2.4 above shall be conditioned as follows:

7.4.1.1.   Temperature-conditioning and hygrometrics

Temperature-conditioning and hygrometrics

The strap shall be kept for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 oC and a relative humidity of 65 ± 5 per cent. If the test is not carried out immediately after conditioning, the specimen shall be placed in a hermetically-closed receptacle until the test begins. The breaking load shall be determined within five minutes after removal of the strap from the conditioning atmosphere or from the receptacle.

o

7.4.1.2.   Light-conditioning

Light-conditioning

| 7.4.1.2.1. | The provisions of Recommendation ISO 105-BO2 (1978) shall apply. The strap shall be exposed to light for the time necessary to produce a contrast equal to grade 4 on the grey scale on Standard Blue Dye No 7. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.2.1.

The provisions of Recommendation ISO 105-BO2 (1978) shall apply. The strap shall be exposed to light for the time necessary to produce a contrast equal to grade 4 on the grey scale on Standard Blue Dye No 7.

| 7.4.1.2.2. | After exposure the strap shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 oC and a relative humidity of 65 ± 5 per cent. If the test is not carried out immediately after conditioning the specimen shall be placed in a hermetically-closed receptacle until the test begins. The breaking load shall be determined within five minutes after removal of the strap from the conditioning installation. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.2.2.

After exposure the strap shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 o

7.4.1.3.   Cold-conditioning

Cold-conditioning

| 7.4.1.3.1. | The strap shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 oC and a relative humidity of 65 ± 5 per cent. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.3.1.

The strap shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 o

| 7.4.1.3.2. | The strap shall then be kept for one and a half hours on a plane surface in a low-temperature chamber in which the air temperature is - 30 ± 5 oC. It shall then be folded and the fold shall be loaded with a mass of 2 kg previously cooled to - 30 ± 5 oC. When the strap has been kept under load for 30 minutes in the same low-temperature chamber, the mass shall be removed and the breaking load shall be measured within 5 minutes after removal of the strap from the low-temperature chamber. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.3.2.

The strap shall then be kept for one and a half hours on a plane surface in a low-temperature chamber in which the air temperature is - 30 ± 5 o

o

7.4.1.4.   Heat-conditioning

Heat-conditioning

| 7.4.1.4.1. | The strap shall be kept for three hours in a heating cabinet in an atmosphere having a temperature of 60 ± 5 oC and a relative humidity of 65 ± 5 per cent. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.4.1.

The strap shall be kept for three hours in a heating cabinet in an atmosphere having a temperature of 60 ± 5 o

| 7.4.1.4.2. | The breaking load shall be determined within five minutes after removal of the strap from the heating cabinet. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.4.2.

The breaking load shall be determined within five minutes after removal of the strap from the heating cabinet.

7.4.1.5.   Exposure to water

Exposure to water

| 7.4.1.5.1. | The strap shall be kept fully immersed for three hours in distilled water, at a temperature of 20 ± 5 oC, to which a trace of a wetting agent has been added. Any wetting agent suitable for the fibre under test may be used. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.5.1.

The strap shall be kept fully immersed for three hours in distilled water, at a temperature of 20 ± 5 o

| 7.4.1.5.2. | The breaking load shall be determined within 10 minutes after removal of the strap from the water. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.5.2.

The breaking load shall be determined within 10 minutes after removal of the strap from the water.

7.4.1.6.   Abrasion conditioning

Abrasion conditioning

| 7.4.1.6.1. | The abrasion conditioning will be performed on every device in which the strap is in contact with a rigid part of the belt, with the exception of all adjusting devices where the micro-slip test (7.3) shows that the strap slips by less than half the prescribed value, in which case, the procedure 1 abrasion conditioning (7.4.1.6.4.1) will not be necessary. The setting on the conditioning device will approximately maintain the relative position of strap and contact area. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.6.1.

The abrasion conditioning will be performed on every device in which the strap is in contact with a rigid part of the belt, with the exception of all adjusting devices where the micro-slip test (7.3) shows that the strap slips by less than half the prescribed value, in which case, the procedure 1 abrasion conditioning (7.4.1.6.4.1) will not be necessary. The setting on the conditioning device will approximately maintain the relative position of strap and contact area.

| 7.4.1.6.2. | The samples shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 oC and relative humidity of 65 ± 5 per cent. The ambient temperature during the abrasion procedure shall be between 15 and 30 oC. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.6.2.

The samples shall be kept for a minimum of 24 hours in an atmosphere having a temperature of 20 ± 5 o

o

| 7.4.1.6.3. | In the table below are listed the general conditions for each abrasion procedure. | Load
  daN | Frequency
  Hz | Cycles Numbers | Shift
  mm |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Procedure 1 | 2,5 | 0,5 | 5 000 | 300 ± 20 |
| Procedure 2 | 0,5 | 0,5 | 45 000 | 300 ± 20 |
| Procedure 3 (*3) | 0 to 5 | 0,5 | 45 000 | — |

7.4.1.6.3.

In the table below are listed the general conditions for each abrasion procedure.

Load

daN

Frequency

Hz

Cycles Numbers

Shift

mm

Procedure 1

2,5

0,5

5 000

300 ± 20

Procedure 2

0,5

0,5

45 000

300 ± 20

Procedure 3 (*3)

*3

0 to 5

0,5

45 000

—

The shift given in the fifth column of this table represents the amplitude of a back and forth motion applied to the strap.

| 7.4.1.6.4. | Particular conditioning procedures |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.6.4.

Particular conditioning procedures

| 7.4.1.6.4.1. | Procedure 1: for cases where the strap slides through an adjusting device.
  A vertical steady load of 2,5 daN shall be maintained on one end of the strap — the other end of the strap shall be attached to a device giving the strap a horizontal back and forth motion.
  The adjusting device shall be placed on the horizontal strap so that the strap remains under tension (see Annex 11, Figure 1 to this Regulation). |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.6.4.1.

Procedure 1: for cases where the strap slides through an adjusting device.

A vertical steady load of 2,5 daN shall be maintained on one end of the strap — the other end of the strap shall be attached to a device giving the strap a horizontal back and forth motion.

The adjusting device shall be placed on the horizontal strap so that the strap remains under tension (see Annex 11, Figure 1 to this Regulation).

| 7.4.1.6.4.2 | Procedure 2: for cases where the strap changes direction in passing through a rigid part.
  During this test, the angles of the straps shall be maintained as shown in Annex 11, Figure 2, to this Regulation.
  The steady load of 0,5 daN shall be maintained during the test.
  For cases where the strap changes direction more than once in passing through a rigid part, the load of 0,5 daN may be increased so as to achieve the prescribed strap movement of 300 mm through that rigid part. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.6.4.2

Procedure 2: for cases where the strap changes direction in passing through a rigid part.

During this test, the angles of the straps shall be maintained as shown in Annex 11, Figure 2, to this Regulation.

The steady load of 0,5 daN shall be maintained during the test.

For cases where the strap changes direction more than once in passing through a rigid part, the load of 0,5 daN may be increased so as to achieve the prescribed strap movement of 300 mm through that rigid part.

| 7.4.1.6.4.3. | Procedure 3: for cases where the strap is fixed to a rigid part by sewing or similar means.
  The total back and forth motion shall be 300 ± 20 mm but the 5 daN load shall only be applied during a shift of 100 ± 20 mm for each half period (see Annex 11, figure 3, to this Regulation). |
| --- | --- |

7.4.1.6.4.3.

Procedure 3: for cases where the strap is fixed to a rigid part by sewing or similar means.

The total back and forth motion shall be 300 ± 20 mm but the 5 daN load shall only be applied during a shift of 100 ± 20 mm for each half period (see Annex 11, figure 3, to this Regulation).

7.4.2.   Test of breaking strength of strap (static test)

| 7.4.2.1. | The test shall be carried out each time on two new samples of strap, of sufficient length, conditioned in conformity with the provisions of paragraph 7.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.2.1.

The test shall be carried out each time on two new samples of strap, of sufficient length, conditioned in conformity with the provisions of paragraph 7.4.1.

| 7.4.2.2. | Each strap shall be gripped between the clamps of a tensile-testing machine. The clamps shall be so designed as to avoid breakage of the strap at or near them. The speed of traverse shall be about 100 mm/min. The free length of the specimen between the clamps of the machine at the start of the test shall be 200 mm ± 40 mm. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.2.2.

Each strap shall be gripped between the clamps of a tensile-testing machine. The clamps shall be so designed as to avoid breakage of the strap at or near them. The speed of traverse shall be about 100 mm/min. The free length of the specimen between the clamps of the machine at the start of the test shall be 200 mm ± 40 mm.

| 7.4.2.3. | When the load reaches 980 daN, the width of the strap shall be measured without stopping the machine. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.2.3.

When the load reaches 980 daN, the width of the strap shall be measured without stopping the machine.

| 7.4.2.4. | The tension shall be increased until the strap breaks, and the breaking load shall be noted. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.2.4.

The tension shall be increased until the strap breaks, and the breaking load shall be noted.

| 7.4.2.5. | If the strap slips or breaks at or within 10 mm of either of the clamps the test shall be invalid and a new test shall be carried out on another specimen. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.2.5.

If the strap slips or breaks at or within 10 mm of either of the clamps the test shall be invalid and a new test shall be carried out on another specimen.

7.5.   Test of belt assembly components incorporating rigid parts

| 7.5.1. | The buckle and the adjusting device shall be connected to the tensile-testing apparatus by the parts of the belt assembly to which they are normally attached, and the load shall then build up to 980 daN.
  In the case of harness belts, the buckle shall be connected to the testing apparatus by the straps which are attached to the buckle and the tongue or two tongues located in an approximately symmetrical way to the geometric centre of the buckle. If the buckle, or the adjusting device, is part of the attachment or of the common part of a three-point belt, the buckle or adjusting device shall be tested with the attachment, in conformity with paragraph 7.5.2 below, except in the case of retractors having a pulley or strap guide at the upper belt anchorage, when the load will be 980 daN and the length of strap remaining wound on the reel shall be the length resulting from locking as close as possible to 450 mm from the end of the strap. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.1.

The buckle and the adjusting device shall be connected to the tensile-testing apparatus by the parts of the belt assembly to which they are normally attached, and the load shall then build up to 980 daN.

In the case of harness belts, the buckle shall be connected to the testing apparatus by the straps which are attached to the buckle and the tongue or two tongues located in an approximately symmetrical way to the geometric centre of the buckle. If the buckle, or the adjusting device, is part of the attachment or of the common part of a three-point belt, the buckle or adjusting device shall be tested with the attachment, in conformity with paragraph 7.5.2 below, except in the case of retractors having a pulley or strap guide at the upper belt anchorage, when the load will be 980 daN and the length of strap remaining wound on the reel shall be the length resulting from locking as close as possible to 450 mm from the end of the strap.

| 7.5.2. | The attachments and any belt adjustment devices for height shall be tested in the manner indicated in paragraph 7.5.1, but the load shall be 1 470 daN and shall, subject to the provisions of the second sentence of paragraph 7.7.1 below, be applied in the least favourable conditions likely to occur in a vehicle in which the belt is correctly installed. In the case of retractors the test is performed with the strap completely unwound from the reel. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.2.

The attachments and any belt adjustment devices for height shall be tested in the manner indicated in paragraph 7.5.1, but the load shall be 1 470 daN and shall, subject to the provisions of the second sentence of paragraph 7.7.1 below, be applied in the least favourable conditions likely to occur in a vehicle in which the belt is correctly installed. In the case of retractors the test is performed with the strap completely unwound from the reel.

| 7.5.3. | Two samples of the complete belt assembly shall be placed in a refrigerated cabinet at - 10o ± 1 oC for two hours. The mating parts of the buckle shall be coupled together manually immediately after being removed from the refrigerated cabinet. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.3.

Two samples of the complete belt assembly shall be placed in a refrigerated cabinet at - 10o

o

| 7.5.4. | Two samples of complete belt assembly shall be placed in a refrigerated cabinet at - 10 oC ± 1 oC for two hours. The rigid items and parts made of plastics under test shall then be laid in turn upon a flat rigid steel surface (which has been kept with the samples in the refrigerated cabinet) placed on the horizontal surface of a compact rigid block with a mass of at least 100 kg and within 30 seconds of being removed from the refrigerated cabinet, an 18 kg steel mass shall be allowed to fall under gravity through 300 mm on to the test sample. The impact face of the 18 kg mass shall take the form of a convex surface with a hardness of at least 45 HRC having a transverse radius of 10 mm and a longitudinal radius of 150 mm placed along the centre line of the mass. One test sample shall be tested with the axis of the curved bar in line with the strap and the other sample shall be tested at 90o to the strap. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.4.

Two samples of complete belt assembly shall be placed in a refrigerated cabinet at - 10 o

o

o

| 7.5.5. | Buckles having parts common to two safety-belts shall be loaded in such a way as to simulate the conditions of use in the vehicle with seats in the mid position of their adjustment. A load of 1 470 daN shall be applied sumultaneously to each strap. The direction of the application of load shall be established according to paragraph 7.7.1 below. A suitable device for the test is shown in Annex 10 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.5.

Buckles having parts common to two safety-belts shall be loaded in such a way as to simulate the conditions of use in the vehicle with seats in the mid position of their adjustment. A load of 1 470 daN shall be applied sumultaneously to each strap. The direction of the application of load shall be established according to paragraph 7.7.1 below. A suitable device for the test is shown in Annex 10 to this Regulation.

| 7.5.6. | When testing a manually adjusting device, the strap shall be drawn steadily through the adjusting device, having regard for the normal conditions of use, at a rate of approximately 100 mm/s and the maximum force measured to the nearest 0,1 daN after the first 25 mm of strap movement. The test shall be carried out in both directions of strap travel through the device, the strap being cycled 10 times prior to the measurement. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.6.

When testing a manually adjusting device, the strap shall be drawn steadily through the adjusting device, having regard for the normal conditions of use, at a rate of approximately 100 mm/s and the maximum force measured to the nearest 0,1 daN after the first 25 mm of strap movement. The test shall be carried out in both directions of strap travel through the device, the strap being cycled 10 times prior to the measurement.

7.6.   Additional tests for safety-belts with retractors

7.6.1.   Durability of retractor mechanism

| 7.6.1.1. | The strap shall be withdrawn and allowed to retract for the required number of cycles at a rate of not more than 30 cycles per minute. In the case of emergency locking retractors, a snatch to lock the retractor shall be introduced at each fifth cycle.
  The snatches shall occur in equal numbers at each of five different extractions, namely, 90, 80, 75, 70 and 65 per cent of the total length of the strap remaining wound on the retractor. However, where more than 900 mm is provided the above percentages shall be related to the final 900 mm of strap which can be withdrawn from the retractor. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.1.1.

The strap shall be withdrawn and allowed to retract for the required number of cycles at a rate of not more than 30 cycles per minute. In the case of emergency locking retractors, a snatch to lock the retractor shall be introduced at each fifth cycle.

The snatches shall occur in equal numbers at each of five different extractions, namely, 90, 80, 75, 70 and 65 per cent of the total length of the strap remaining wound on the retractor. However, where more than 900 mm is provided the above percentages shall be related to the final 900 mm of strap which can be withdrawn from the retractor.

| 7.6.1.2. | A suitable apparatus for the tests specified in paragraph 7.6.1.1 above is shown in Annex 3 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.1.2.

A suitable apparatus for the tests specified in paragraph 7.6.1.1 above is shown in Annex 3 to this Regulation.

7.6.2.   Locking of emergency locking retractors

| 7.6.2.1. | The retractor shall be tested once for locking when the strap has been unwound to full length less 300 ± 3 mm. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.2.1.

The retractor shall be tested once for locking when the strap has been unwound to full length less 300 ± 3 mm.

| 7.6.2.1.1. | In the case of a retractor actuated by strap movement, the extraction shall be in the direction in which it normally occurs when the retractor is installed in a vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.2.1.1.

In the case of a retractor actuated by strap movement, the extraction shall be in the direction in which it normally occurs when the retractor is installed in a vehicle.

| 7.6.2.1.2. | When retractors are being tested for sensitivity to vehicle deceleration they shall be tested at the above extraction along two perpendicular axes, which are horizontal if the retractor is installed in a vehicle as specified by the safety-belt manufacturer. When this position is not specified, the testing authority shall consult the safety-belt manufacturer. One of these axes shall be in the direction chosen by the technical service conducting the approval test to give the most adverse conditions with respect to actuation of the locking mechanism. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.2.1.2.

When retractors are being tested for sensitivity to vehicle deceleration they shall be tested at the above extraction along two perpendicular axes, which are horizontal if the retractor is installed in a vehicle as specified by the safety-belt manufacturer. When this position is not specified, the testing authority shall consult the safety-belt manufacturer. One of these axes shall be in the direction chosen by the technical service conducting the approval test to give the most adverse conditions with respect to actuation of the locking mechanism.

| 7.6.2.2. | A suitable apparatus for the tests specified in paragraph 7.6.2.1 above is described in Annex 4 to this Regulation. The design of any such test apparatus shall ensure that the required acceleration is given before the webbing is withdrawn out of the retractor by more than 5 mm and that the withdrawal takes place at an average rate of increase of acceleration of at least 25 g/s (4) and not more than 150 g/s (4). |
| --- | --- |

7.6.2.2.

A suitable apparatus for the tests specified in paragraph 7.6.2.1 above is described in Annex 4 to this Regulation. The design of any such test apparatus shall ensure that the required acceleration is given before the webbing is withdrawn out of the retractor by more than 5 mm and that the withdrawal takes place at an average rate of increase of acceleration of at least 25 g/s (4

4

| 7.6.2.3. | To check conformity with the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1.3 and 6.2.5.3.1.4, the retractor shall be mounted on a horizontal table and the table tilted with a speed not exceeding 2o per second until locking has occurred. The test shall be repeated with tilting in other directions to ensure that the requirements are fulfilled. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.2.3.

To check conformity with the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1.3 and 6.2.5.3.1.4, the retractor shall be mounted on a horizontal table and the table tilted with a speed not exceeding 2o

7.6.3.   Dust resistance

| 7.6.3.1. | The retractor shall be positioned in a test chamber as described in Annex 5 to this Regulation. It shall be mounted in an orientation similar to that in which it is mounted in the vehicle. The test chamber shall contain dust as specified in paragraph 7.6.3.2 below. A length of 500 mm of the strap shall be extracted from the retractor and kept extracted, except that it shall be subjected to 10 complete cycles of retraction and withdrawal within one or two minutes after each agitation of the dust. For a period of five hours, the dust shall be agitated every 20 minutes for five seconds by compressed air free of oil and moisture at a gauge pressure of 5,5 · 105 +0,5 · 105 Pa entering through an orifice, 1,5 ±0,1 mm in diameter. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.3.1.

The retractor shall be positioned in a test chamber as described in Annex 5 to this Regulation. It shall be mounted in an orientation similar to that in which it is mounted in the vehicle. The test chamber shall contain dust as specified in paragraph 7.6.3.2 below. A length of 500 mm of the strap shall be extracted from the retractor and kept extracted, except that it shall be subjected to 10 complete cycles of retraction and withdrawal within one or two minutes after each agitation of the dust. For a period of five hours, the dust shall be agitated every 20 minutes for five seconds by compressed air free of oil and moisture at a gauge pressure of 5,5 · 105

5

| 7.6.3.2. | The dust used in the test described in paragraph 7.6.3.1 above shall consist of about 1 kg of dry quartz. The particle size distribution is as follows:






  (a) | passing 150 μm aperture, 104 μm wire diameter: 99 to 100 per cent; |
| --- | --- | --- |

7.6.3.2.

The dust used in the test described in paragraph 7.6.3.1 above shall consist of about 1 kg of dry quartz. The particle size distribution is as follows:

(a)

passing 150 μm aperture, 104 μm wire diameter: 99 to 100 per cent;

| (b) | passing 105 μm aperture, 64 μm wire diameter: 76 to 86 per cent |
| --- | --- |

(b)

passing 105 μm aperture, 64 μm wire diameter: 76 to 86 per cent

| (c) | passing 75 μm aperture, 52 μm wire diameter: 60 to 70 per cent. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

passing 75 μm aperture, 52 μm wire diameter: 60 to 70 per cent.

7.6.4.   Retracting forces

| 7.6.4.1. | The retracting force shall be measured with the safety-belt assembly fitted to a dummy as for the dynamic test prescribed in paragraph 7.7. The strap tension shall be measured at the point of contact with (but just clear of) the dummy while the strap is being retracted at the approximate rate of 0,6 m/min. In the case of a safety-belt with tension-reducing device, the retracting force and strap tension shall be measured with the tension-reducing device in both operation mode and non-operation mode. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.4.1.

The retracting force shall be measured with the safety-belt assembly fitted to a dummy as for the dynamic test prescribed in paragraph 7.7. The strap tension shall be measured at the point of contact with (but just clear of) the dummy while the strap is being retracted at the approximate rate of 0,6 m/min. In the case of a safety-belt with tension-reducing device, the retracting force and strap tension shall be measured with the tension-reducing device in both operation mode and non-operation mode.

| 7.6.4.2. | Before the dynamic test described in paragraph 7.7 the seated dummy, which is clothed with a cotton shirt, shall be tilted frontward until 350 mm of the strap is withdrawn from retractor, and then released to the initial position. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.4.2.

Before the dynamic test described in paragraph 7.7 the seated dummy, which is clothed with a cotton shirt, shall be tilted frontward until 350 mm of the strap is withdrawn from retractor, and then released to the initial position.

7.7.   Dynamic test of belt assembly or of the restraint system

| 7.7.1. | The belt assembly shall be mounted on a trolley equipped with the seat and the anchorage defined in Annex 6 to this Regulation. However, if the belt assembly is intended for a specific vehicle or for specific types of vehicle, the distances between the manikin and the anchorages shall be determined by the service conducting the tests, either in conformity with the instructions for fitting supplied with the belt or in conformity with the data supplied by the manufacturer of the vehicle. If the belt is equipped with a belt adjustment device for height such as defined in paragraph 2.9.6 above, the position of the device and the means of securing it shall be the same as those of the vehicle design.
  In that case, when the dynamic test has been carried out for a type of vehicle it need not be repeated for other types of vehicle where each anchorage point is less than 50 mm distant from the corresponding anchorage point of the tested belt. Alternatively, manufacturers may determine hypothetical anchorage positions for testing in order to enclose the maximum number of real anchorage points. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.

The belt assembly shall be mounted on a trolley equipped with the seat and the anchorage defined in Annex 6 to this Regulation. However, if the belt assembly is intended for a specific vehicle or for specific types of vehicle, the distances between the manikin and the anchorages shall be determined by the service conducting the tests, either in conformity with the instructions for fitting supplied with the belt or in conformity with the data supplied by the manufacturer of the vehicle. If the belt is equipped with a belt adjustment device for height such as defined in paragraph 2.9.6 above, the position of the device and the means of securing it shall be the same as those of the vehicle design.

In that case, when the dynamic test has been carried out for a type of vehicle it need not be repeated for other types of vehicle where each anchorage point is less than 50 mm distant from the corresponding anchorage point of the tested belt. Alternatively, manufacturers may determine hypothetical anchorage positions for testing in order to enclose the maximum number of real anchorage points.

| 7.7.1.1. | In the case of a safety-belt or restraint system forming part of an assembly for which type approval is requested as a restraint system, the safety-belt shall be mounted on the part of the vehicle structure to which the restraint system is normally fitted and this part shall be rigidly attached to the test trolley in the way prescribed in paragraphs 7.7.1.2 to 7.7.1.6.
  In the case of a safety-belt or restraint system with pre-loading devices relying on component parts other than those incorporated in the belt assembly itself, the belt assembly shall be mounted in conjunction with the necessary additional vehicle parts on the test trolley in the manner prescribed in paragraphs 7.7.1.2 to 7.7.1.6.
  Alternatively, in the case where those devices cannot be tested on the test trolley, the manufacturer may demonstrate by a conventional frontal impact test at 50 km/h in conformity with the procedure ISO 3560 (1975) that the device complies with the requirements of the Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.1.

In the case of a safety-belt or restraint system forming part of an assembly for which type approval is requested as a restraint system, the safety-belt shall be mounted on the part of the vehicle structure to which the restraint system is normally fitted and this part shall be rigidly attached to the test trolley in the way prescribed in paragraphs 7.7.1.2 to 7.7.1.6.

In the case of a safety-belt or restraint system with pre-loading devices relying on component parts other than those incorporated in the belt assembly itself, the belt assembly shall be mounted in conjunction with the necessary additional vehicle parts on the test trolley in the manner prescribed in paragraphs 7.7.1.2 to 7.7.1.6.

Alternatively, in the case where those devices cannot be tested on the test trolley, the manufacturer may demonstrate by a conventional frontal impact test at 50 km/h in conformity with the procedure ISO 3560 (1975) that the device complies with the requirements of the Regulation.

| 7.7.1.2. | The method used to secure the vehicle during the test shall not be such as to strengthen the anchorages of the seats or safety-belts or to lessen the normal deformation of the structure. No forward part of the vehicle shall be present which by limiting the forward movement of the manikin excepting the foot, would reduce the load imposed on the restraint system during the test. The parts of the structure eliminated can be replaced by parts of equivalent strength provided they do not hinder the forward movement of the manikin. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.2.

The method used to secure the vehicle during the test shall not be such as to strengthen the anchorages of the seats or safety-belts or to lessen the normal deformation of the structure. No forward part of the vehicle shall be present which by limiting the forward movement of the manikin excepting the foot, would reduce the load imposed on the restraint system during the test. The parts of the structure eliminated can be replaced by parts of equivalent strength provided they do not hinder the forward movement of the manikin.

| 7.7.1.3. | A securing device shall be regarded as satisfactory if it produces no effect on an area extending over the whole width of the structure and if the vehicle or the structure is blocked or fixed in front at a distance of not less than 500 mm from the anchorage of the restraint system. At the rear the structure shall be secured at a sufficient distance rearwards of the anchorages to ensure that the requirements of paragraph 7.7.1.2 above are fulfilled. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.3.

A securing device shall be regarded as satisfactory if it produces no effect on an area extending over the whole width of the structure and if the vehicle or the structure is blocked or fixed in front at a distance of not less than 500 mm from the anchorage of the restraint system. At the rear the structure shall be secured at a sufficient distance rearwards of the anchorages to ensure that the requirements of paragraph 7.7.1.2 above are fulfilled.

| 7.7.1.4. | The seats shall be fitted and shall be placed in the position for driving use chosen by the technical service conducting approval tests to give the most adverse conditions with respect to strength, compatible with installing the manikin in the vehicle. The positions of the seats shall be stated in the report. The seat back, if adjustable for inclination, shall be locked as specified by the manufacturer or, in the absence of any specification, to an actual seat back angle as near as possible to 25o in the case of vehicles of categories M1 and N1 as near as possible to 15o in the case of vehicles of all other categories. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.4.

The seats shall be fitted and shall be placed in the position for driving use chosen by the technical service conducting approval tests to give the most adverse conditions with respect to strength, compatible with installing the manikin in the vehicle. The positions of the seats shall be stated in the report. The seat back, if adjustable for inclination, shall be locked as specified by the manufacturer or, in the absence of any specification, to an actual seat back angle as near as possible to 25o

o

| 7.7.1.5. | For the assessment of the requirements in paragraph 6.4.1.4.1 the seat shall be regarded in its most forward driving or travelling position appropriate to the dimensions of the manikin. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.5.

For the assessment of the requirements in paragraph 6.4.1.4.1 the seat shall be regarded in its most forward driving or travelling position appropriate to the dimensions of the manikin.

| 7.7.1.6. | All the seats of any group of seats shall be tested simultaneously. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.6.

All the seats of any group of seats shall be tested simultaneously.

| 7.7.1.7. | The dynamic tests of the harness belt system shall be carried out without the crotch strap (assembly), if there is any. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.1.7.

The dynamic tests of the harness belt system shall be carried out without the crotch strap (assembly), if there is any.

| 7.7.2. | The belt assembly shall be attached to the manikin in Annex 7 to this Regulation as follows: a board 25 mm thick shall be placed between the back of the manikin and the seat back. The belt shall be firmly adjusted to the manikin. The board shall then be removed so that the entire length of its back is in contact with the seat back. A check shall be made to ensure that the mode of engagement of the two parts of the buckle entails no risk of reducing the reliability of locking. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.2.

The belt assembly shall be attached to the manikin in Annex 7 to this Regulation as follows: a board 25 mm thick shall be placed between the back of the manikin and the seat back. The belt shall be firmly adjusted to the manikin. The board shall then be removed so that the entire length of its back is in contact with the seat back. A check shall be made to ensure that the mode of engagement of the two parts of the buckle entails no risk of reducing the reliability of locking.

| 7.7.3. | The free ends of the straps shall extend sufficiently far beyond the adjusting devices to allow for slip. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.3.

The free ends of the straps shall extend sufficiently far beyond the adjusting devices to allow for slip.

| 7.7.4. | The trolley shall then be so propelled that at the moment of impact its free running speed is 50 km/h ± 1 km/h and the manikin remains stable. The stopping distance of the trolley shall be 40 cm ± 5 cm. The trolley shall remain horizontal throughout deceleration. The deceleration of the trolley shall be achieved by using the apparatus described in Annex 6 to this Regulation or any other device giving equivalent results. This apparatus shall comply with the performance specified in Annex 8 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.4.

The trolley shall then be so propelled that at the moment of impact its free running speed is 50 km/h ± 1 km/h and the manikin remains stable. The stopping distance of the trolley shall be 40 cm ± 5 cm. The trolley shall remain horizontal throughout deceleration. The deceleration of the trolley shall be achieved by using the apparatus described in Annex 6 to this Regulation or any other device giving equivalent results. This apparatus shall comply with the performance specified in Annex 8 to this Regulation.

| 7.7.5. | The trolley speed immediately before impact, the forward displacement of the manikin and the speed of the chest at a 300 mm displacement of the chest shall be measured. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.5.

The trolley speed immediately before impact, the forward displacement of the manikin and the speed of the chest at a 300 mm displacement of the chest shall be measured.

| 7.7.6. | After impact, the belt assembly or restraint system and its rigid parts shall be inspected visually, without opening the buckle, to determine whether there has been any failure or breakage. In the case of restraint systems it shall also be ascertained, after the test, whether the parts of the vehicle structure which are attached to the trolley have undergone any visible permanent deformation. If there is any such deformation this shall be taken into account in any calculation made in accordance with paragraph 6.4.1.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.6.

After impact, the belt assembly or restraint system and its rigid parts shall be inspected visually, without opening the buckle, to determine whether there has been any failure or breakage. In the case of restraint systems it shall also be ascertained, after the test, whether the parts of the vehicle structure which are attached to the trolley have undergone any visible permanent deformation. If there is any such deformation this shall be taken into account in any calculation made in accordance with paragraph 6.4.1.4.1.

7.8.   Buckle-opening test

| 7.8.1. | For this test, belt assemblies or restraint devices which have already undergone the dynamic test in conformity with paragraph 7.7 above shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.1.

For this test, belt assemblies or restraint devices which have already undergone the dynamic test in conformity with paragraph 7.7 above shall be used.

| 7.8.2. | The belt assembly shall be removed from the test trolley without the buckle being opened. A load shall be applied to the buckle by direct traction via the straps tied to it so that all the straps are subjected to the force of

  daN. (It is understood that n is the number of straps linked to the buckle when it is in a locked position.) In the case where the buckle is connected to a rigid part, the load shall be applied at the same angle as the one formed by the buckle and the rigid end during the dynamic test. A load shall be applied at a speed of 400 ± 20 mm/min to the geometric centre of the buckle-release button along a fixed axis running parallel to the initial direction of motion of the button. During the application of the force needed to open the buckle, the buckle shall be held by a rigid support. The load quoted above shall not exceed the limit indicated in paragraph 6.2.2.5 above. The point of contact of the test equipment shall be spherical in form with a radius of 2,5 mm ±0,1 mm. It shall have a polished metal surface. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.2.

The belt assembly shall be removed from the test trolley without the buckle being opened. A load shall be applied to the buckle by direct traction via the straps tied to it so that all the straps are subjected to the force of
  Formula
  daN. (It is understood that n is the number of straps linked to the buckle when it is in a locked position.) In the case where the buckle is connected to a rigid part, the load shall be applied at the same angle as the one formed by the buckle and the rigid end during the dynamic test. A load shall be applied at a speed of 400 ± 20 mm/min to the geometric centre of the buckle-release button along a fixed axis running parallel to the initial direction of motion of the button. During the application of the force needed to open the buckle, the buckle shall be held by a rigid support. The load quoted above shall not exceed the limit indicated in paragraph 6.2.2.5 above. The point of contact of the test equipment shall be spherical in form with a radius of 2,5 mm ±0,1 mm. It shall have a polished metal surface.

| 7.8.3. | The buckle-opening force shall be measured and any failure of the buckle noted. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.3.

The buckle-opening force shall be measured and any failure of the buckle noted.

| 7.8.4. | After the buckle-opening test, the components of the belt assembly or of the restraint device which have undergone the tests prescribed in paragraph 7.7 above shall be inspected and the extent of the damage sustained by the belt assembly or restraint device during the dynamic test shall be recorded in the test report. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.4.

After the buckle-opening test, the components of the belt assembly or of the restraint device which have undergone the tests prescribed in paragraph 7.7 above shall be inspected and the extent of the damage sustained by the belt assembly or restraint device during the dynamic test shall be recorded in the test report.

7.9.   Additional tests on safety-belts with pre-loading devices

7.9.1.   Conditioning

The pre-loading device may be separated from the safety-belt to be tested and kept for 24 hours at a temperature of 60o ± 5 oC. The temperature shall then be raised to 100o ± 5 oC for two hours. Subsequently it shall be kept for 24 hours at a temperature of - 30o ± 5 oC. After being removed from conditioning, the device shall warm up to ambient temperature. If it has been separated it shall be fitted again to the safety-belt.

o

o

o

o

o

o

7.10.   Test report

| 7.10.1. | The test report shall record the results of all the tests in paragraph 7 above and in particular the trolley speed, the maximum forward displacement of the manikin, the place — if it can be varied — occupied by the buckle during the test, the buckle-opening force, and any failure or breakage. If by virtue of paragraph 7.7.1 the anchorages prescribed in Annex 6 to this Regulation have not been respected, the test report shall describe how the belt assembly or the restraint system was installed and shall specify important angles and dimensions. The report shall also mention any distortion or breakage of the buckle that has occurred during the test. In the case of a restraint system the test report shall also specify the manner of attaching the vehicle structure to the trolley, the position of the seats, and the inclination of the seat backs. If the forward displacement of the manikin has exceeded the values prescribed in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 above, the report shall state whether the requirements of paragraph 6.4.1.4.1 have been met. |
| --- | --- |

7.10.1.

The test report shall record the results of all the tests in paragraph 7 above and in particular the trolley speed, the maximum forward displacement of the manikin, the place — if it can be varied — occupied by the buckle during the test, the buckle-opening force, and any failure or breakage. If by virtue of paragraph 7.7.1 the anchorages prescribed in Annex 6 to this Regulation have not been respected, the test report shall describe how the belt assembly or the restraint system was installed and shall specify important angles and dimensions. The report shall also mention any distortion or breakage of the buckle that has occurred during the test. In the case of a restraint system the test report shall also specify the manner of attaching the vehicle structure to the trolley, the position of the seats, and the inclination of the seat backs. If the forward displacement of the manikin has exceeded the values prescribed in paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 above, the report shall state whether the requirements of paragraph 6.4.1.4.1 have been met.

8.   REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE INSTALLATION IN THE VEHICLE

8.1.   Vehicle equipment

| 8.1.1. | With the exception of folding seats (as defined in Regulation No 14) and seating intended solely for use when the vehicle is stationary, the seats of vehicles of categories M and N as defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3) (*4) (except those vehicles of categories M2 and M3 which belong to Classes I or II, according to Regulation No 36, to Class A, according to Regulation No 52 and to Classes I or II and A, according to Regulation No 107) must be equipped with safety-belts or restraint systems which satisfy the requirements of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.1.

With the exception of folding seats (as defined in Regulation No 14) and seating intended solely for use when the vehicle is stationary, the seats of vehicles of categories M and N as defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3) (*4

2

3

| 8.1.2. | The types of safety-belts or restraint systems for each seating position where installation is required shall be those specified in Annex 16 (with which neither non-locking retractors (para. 2.14.1) nor manually unlocking retractor (para. 2.14.2) can be used). For all seating positions where lap belts type B are specified in Annex 16 lap belts type Br3 are permitted except in the case that, in use, they retract to such an extent as to reduce comfort in a notable way after normal buckling up. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.2.

The types of safety-belts or restraint systems for each seating position where installation is required shall be those specified in Annex 16 (with which neither non-locking retractors (para. 2.14.1) nor manually unlocking retractor (para. 2.14.2) can be used). For all seating positions where lap belts type B are specified in Annex 16 lap belts type Br3 are permitted except in the case that, in use, they retract to such an extent as to reduce comfort in a notable way after normal buckling up.

| 8.1.2.1. | However, for outboard seating positions, other than front, of vehicles of the category N1 shown in Annex 16 and marked with the symbol Ø, the installation of a lap belt of type Br4m or Br4Nm is allowed, where there exists a passage between a seat and the nearest side wall of the vehicle intended to permit access of passengers to other parts of the vehicle. A space between a seat and the side wall is considered as a passage, if the distance between that side wall, with all doors closed, and a vertical longitudinal plane passing through the centre line of the seat concerned — measured at the R-point position and perpendicularly to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle — is more than 500 mm. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.2.1.

However, for outboard seating positions, other than front, of vehicles of the category N1

| 8.1.3. | Where no safety-belts are required any type of safety-belt or restraint system conforming to this Regulation may be provided at the choice of the manufacturer. A-type belts of the types permitted in Annex 16 may be provided as an alternative to lap belts for those seating positions where lap belts are specified in Annex 16. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.3.

Where no safety-belts are required any type of safety-belt or restraint system conforming to this Regulation may be provided at the choice of the manufacturer. A-type belts of the types permitted in Annex 16 may be provided as an alternative to lap belts for those seating positions where lap belts are specified in Annex 16.

| 8.1.4. | On three point belts fitted with retractors, one retractor must operate at least on the diagonal strap. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.4.

On three point belts fitted with retractors, one retractor must operate at least on the diagonal strap.

| 8.1.5. | Except for vehicles of category M1 an emergency locking retractor of type 4N (para. 2.14.5) may be permitted instead of a retractor of type 4 (para. 2.14.4) where it has been shown to the satisfaction of the services responsible for the tests that the fitting of a type 4 retractor would not be practical. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.5.

Except for vehicles of category M1

| 8.1.6. | For the front outboard and the front centre seating positions shown in Annex 16 and marked with the symbol *, lap belts of the type specified on that annex shall be considered adequate where the windscreen is located outside the reference zone defined in Annex 1 to Regulation No 21.
  As regards safety-belts, the windscreen is considered as part of the reference zone when it is capable of entering into static contact with the test apparatus according to the method described in Annex 1 of Regulation No 21. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.6.

For the front outboard and the front centre seating positions shown in Annex 16 and marked with the symbol *, lap belts of the type specified on that annex shall be considered adequate where the windscreen is located outside the reference zone defined in Annex 1 to Regulation No 21.

As regards safety-belts, the windscreen is considered as part of the reference zone when it is capable of entering into static contact with the test apparatus according to the method described in Annex 1 of Regulation No 21.

| 8.1.7. | Every seating position in Annex 16 marked with the symbol •, three-point belts of a type specified in Annex 16 shall be provided unless one of the following conditions is fulfilled, in which case two-point belts of a type specified in Annex 16 may be provided. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.7.

Every seating position in Annex 16 marked with the symbol •, three-point belts of a type specified in Annex 16 shall be provided unless one of the following conditions is fulfilled, in which case two-point belts of a type specified in Annex 16 may be provided.

| 8.1.7.1. | There is a seat or other vehicle parts conforming to paragraph 3.5 of Appendix 1 to Regulation No 80 directly in front, or |
| --- | --- |

8.1.7.1.

There is a seat or other vehicle parts conforming to paragraph 3.5 of Appendix 1 to Regulation No 80 directly in front, or

| 8.1.7.2. | No part of the vehicle is in or, when the vehicle is in motion, capable of being in the reference zone, or |
| --- | --- |

8.1.7.2.

No part of the vehicle is in or, when the vehicle is in motion, capable of being in the reference zone, or

| 8.1.7.3. | Parts of the vehicle within the said reference zone comply with the energy absorbing requirements set out in Appendix 6 of Regulation No 80. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.7.3.

Parts of the vehicle within the said reference zone comply with the energy absorbing requirements set out in Appendix 6 of Regulation No 80.

| 8.1.8. | With the exception of the case covered by paragraph 8.1.9, every passenger seating position which is fitted with an airbag shall be provided with a warning against the use of a rearward-facing child restraint in that seating position. The warning label, in the form of a pictogram which may include explanatory text, shall be durably affixed and located such that it is easily visible in front of a person about to install a rearward-facing child restraint on the seat in question. An example of a possible design of a pictogram is shown in Figure 1. A permanent reference should be visible at all times, in case the warning is not visible when the door is closed.
  Figure 1





  Colours:






  — | the pictogram is red |
| --- | --- | --- |

8.1.8.

With the exception of the case covered by paragraph 8.1.9, every passenger seating position which is fitted with an airbag shall be provided with a warning against the use of a rearward-facing child restraint in that seating position. The warning label, in the form of a pictogram which may include explanatory text, shall be durably affixed and located such that it is easily visible in front of a person about to install a rearward-facing child restraint on the seat in question. An example of a possible design of a pictogram is shown in Figure 1. A permanent reference should be visible at all times, in case the warning is not visible when the door is closed.

Figure 1

Image 38

Colours:

—

the pictogram is red

| — | seat, child seat and contour line of the airbag are black |
| --- | --- |

—

seat, child seat and contour line of the airbag are black

| — | the word airbag as well as the airbag are white. |
| --- | --- |

—

the word airbag as well as the airbag are white.

| 8.1.9. | The requirements of paragraph 8.1.8 shall not apply if the vehicle is fitted with a mechanism which senses automatically the presence of any rearward-facing child restraint, and ensures that the airbag will not be deployed when such a child restraint system is fitted. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.9.

The requirements of paragraph 8.1.8 shall not apply if the vehicle is fitted with a mechanism which senses automatically the presence of any rearward-facing child restraint, and ensures that the airbag will not be deployed when such a child restraint system is fitted.

| 8.1.10. | In the case of seats capable of being turned to or placed in other orientations, designed for use when the vehicle is stationary, the requirements of paragraph 8.1.1 shall only apply to those orientations designated for normal use when the vehicle is travelling on a road, in accordance with this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.10.

In the case of seats capable of being turned to or placed in other orientations, designed for use when the vehicle is stationary, the requirements of paragraph 8.1.1 shall only apply to those orientations designated for normal use when the vehicle is travelling on a road, in accordance with this Regulation.

8.2.   General requirements

| 8.2.1. | Safety-belts, restraint systems, and Isofix child restraint systems according to Table 2 of Annex 17 — Appendix 3, shall be fixed to anchorages conforming to the specifications of Regulation No 14, such as the design and dimensional characteristics, the number of anchorages, and the strength requirements. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.1.

Safety-belts, restraint systems, and Isofix child restraint systems according to Table 2 of Annex 17 — Appendix 3, shall be fixed to anchorages conforming to the specifications of Regulation No 14, such as the design and dimensional characteristics, the number of anchorages, and the strength requirements.

| 8.2.2. | The safety-belts, restraint systems, child restraint systems and Isofix child restraint systems recommended by the manufacturer according to Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 17 — Appendix 3, shall be so installed that they will work satisfactorily and reduce the risk of bodily injury in the event of an accident. In particular they shall be so installed that: |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.

The safety-belts, restraint systems, child restraint systems and Isofix child restraint systems recommended by the manufacturer according to Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 17 — Appendix 3, shall be so installed that they will work satisfactorily and reduce the risk of bodily injury in the event of an accident. In particular they shall be so installed that:

| 8.2.2.1. | The straps are not liable to assume a dangerous configuration; |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.1.

The straps are not liable to assume a dangerous configuration;

| 8.2.2.2. | That the danger of a correctly positioned belt slipping from the shoulder of a wearer as a result of his/her forward movement is reduced to a minimum. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.2.

That the danger of a correctly positioned belt slipping from the shoulder of a wearer as a result of his/her forward movement is reduced to a minimum.

| 8.2.2.3. | The risk of the strap deteriorating through contact with sharp parts of the vehicle or seat structure, child restraint systems or Isofix child restraint systems recommended by the manufacturer according to Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 17 — Appendix 3, is reduced to a minimum. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.3.

The risk of the strap deteriorating through contact with sharp parts of the vehicle or seat structure, child restraint systems or Isofix child restraint systems recommended by the manufacturer according to Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 17 — Appendix 3, is reduced to a minimum.

| 8.2.2.4. | The design and installation of every safety-belt provided for each seating position shall be such as to be readily available for use. Furthermore, where the complete seat or the seat cushion and/or the seat back can be folded to permit access to rear of the vehicle or to goods or luggage compartment, after folding and restoring those seats to the seating position, the safety-belts provided for those seats shall be accessible for use or can be easily recovered from under or behind the seat, by one person, according to instructions in the vehicle users handbook, without the need for that person to have training or practice. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.4.

The design and installation of every safety-belt provided for each seating position shall be such as to be readily available for use. Furthermore, where the complete seat or the seat cushion and/or the seat back can be folded to permit access to rear of the vehicle or to goods or luggage compartment, after folding and restoring those seats to the seating position, the safety-belts provided for those seats shall be accessible for use or can be easily recovered from under or behind the seat, by one person, according to instructions in the vehicle users handbook, without the need for that person to have training or practice.

| 8.2.2.5. | The technical service shall verify that, with the buckle tongue engaged in the buckle and no occupant in the seat: |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.5.

The technical service shall verify that, with the buckle tongue engaged in the buckle and no occupant in the seat:

| 8.2.2.5.1. | The possible slack in the belt does not prevent the correct installation of child restraint systems recommended by the manufacturer, and |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.5.1.

The possible slack in the belt does not prevent the correct installation of child restraint systems recommended by the manufacturer, and

| 8.2.2.5.2. | In the case of three-point belts, a tension of at least 50 N can be established in the lap section of the belt by external application of tension in the diagonal section of the belt. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.5.2.

In the case of three-point belts, a tension of at least 50 N can be established in the lap section of the belt by external application of tension in the diagonal section of the belt.

8.3.   Special requirements for rigid parts incorporated in safety-belts or restraint systems

| 8.3.1. | Rigid parts, such as the buckles, adjusting devices and attachments, shall not increase the risk of bodily injury to the wearer or to other occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.1.

Rigid parts, such as the buckles, adjusting devices and attachments, shall not increase the risk of bodily injury to the wearer or to other occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

| 8.3.2. | The device for releasing the buckle shall be clearly visible to the wearer and within his easy reach and shall be so designed that it cannot be opened inadvertently or accidentally. The buckle shall also be located in such a position that it is readily accessible to a rescuer needing to release the wearer in an emergency.
  The buckle shall be so installed that, both when not under load and when sustaining the wearer's mass, it is capable of being released by the wearer with a single simple movement of either hand in one direction.
  In the case of a safety-belts or restraint systems for front outboard seating positions, except if these are harness belts, the buckle shall also be capable of being locked in the same manner.
  A check shall be made to ensure that, if the buckle is in contact with the wearer, the width of the contact surface is not less than 46 mm.
  A check shall be made to ensure that, if the buckle is in contact with the wearer, the contact surface satisfies the requirements of paragraph 6.2.2.1 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.2.

The device for releasing the buckle shall be clearly visible to the wearer and within his easy reach and shall be so designed that it cannot be opened inadvertently or accidentally. The buckle shall also be located in such a position that it is readily accessible to a rescuer needing to release the wearer in an emergency.

The buckle shall be so installed that, both when not under load and when sustaining the wearer's mass, it is capable of being released by the wearer with a single simple movement of either hand in one direction.

In the case of a safety-belts or restraint systems for front outboard seating positions, except if these are harness belts, the buckle shall also be capable of being locked in the same manner.

A check shall be made to ensure that, if the buckle is in contact with the wearer, the width of the contact surface is not less than 46 mm.

A check shall be made to ensure that, if the buckle is in contact with the wearer, the contact surface satisfies the requirements of paragraph 6.2.2.1 of this Regulation.

| 8.3.3. | When the belt is being worn, it shall either adjust automatically to fit the wearer or be so designed that the manual adjusting device is readily accessible to the wearer when seated and is convenient and easy to use. It shall also be possible for it to be tightened with one hand to suit the build of the wearer and the position of the vehicle seat. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.3.

When the belt is being worn, it shall either adjust automatically to fit the wearer or be so designed that the manual adjusting device is readily accessible to the wearer when seated and is convenient and easy to use. It shall also be possible for it to be tightened with one hand to suit the build of the wearer and the position of the vehicle seat.

| 8.3.4. | Safety-belts or restraint systems incorporating retractors shall be so installed that the retractors are able to operate correctly and stow the strap efficiently. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.4.

Safety-belts or restraint systems incorporating retractors shall be so installed that the retractors are able to operate correctly and stow the strap efficiently.

| 8.3.5. | In order to inform vehicle user(s) of the provisions made for the transport of children, vehicles of categories M1 and N1 shall meet the information requirements of Annex 17. Any vehicle of category M1 must be equipped with ISOFIX positions, in accordance with the relevant prescriptions of Regulation No 14.
  The first ISOFIX position shall allow at least the installation of one out of the three forward-facing fixtures as defined in Appendix 2 of Annex 17; the second ISOFIX position shall allow at least the installation of one out of the three rear-facing fixtures as defined in Appendix 2 of Annex 17. For this second ISOFIX position, in case where the installation of the rear-facing fixture is not possible on the second row of seats of the vehicle due to its design, the installation of one out of the six fixtures is allowed in any position of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.5.

In order to inform vehicle user(s) of the provisions made for the transport of children, vehicles of categories M1

1

1

The first ISOFIX position shall allow at least the installation of one out of the three forward-facing fixtures as defined in Appendix 2 of Annex 17; the second ISOFIX position shall allow at least the installation of one out of the three rear-facing fixtures as defined in Appendix 2 of Annex 17. For this second ISOFIX position, in case where the installation of the rear-facing fixture is not possible on the second row of seats of the vehicle due to its design, the installation of one out of the six fixtures is allowed in any position of the vehicle.

9.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 9.1. | Every vehicle type or safety-belt or restraint system approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraphs 6, 7 and 8 above. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Every vehicle type or safety-belt or restraint system approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraphs 6, 7 and 8 above.

| 9.2. | The minimum requirements for conformity of production control procedures set forth in Annex 14 to this Regulation shall be complied with. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

The minimum requirements for conformity of production control procedures set forth in Annex 14 to this Regulation shall be complied with.

| 9.3. | The authority which has granted type-approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be twice a year. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

The authority which has granted type-approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be twice a year.

10.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 10.1. | The approval granted in respect of a vehicle or a type of belt or restraint system may be withdrawn if the requirement laid down in paragraph 9.1. above is not complied with, or if the safety-belt(s) or restraint system(s) selected have failed to pass the checks prescribed in paragraph 9.2. above. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

The approval granted in respect of a vehicle or a type of belt or restraint system may be withdrawn if the requirement laid down in paragraph 9.1. above is not complied with, or if the safety-belt(s) or restraint system(s) selected have failed to pass the checks prescribed in paragraph 9.2. above.

| 10.2. | If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1A or Annex 1B to this Regulation (as appropriate). |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1A or Annex 1B to this Regulation (as appropriate).

11.   MODIFICATIONS AND EXTENSION OF APPROVAL OF THE VEHICLE TYPE OR SAFETY-BELT OR RESTRAINT SYSTEM TYPE

| 11.1. | Every modification of the vehicle type or the belt or restraint system or both shall be notified to the administrative department which approved the vehicle type or safety-belt or restraint system type. The department may then either: |
| --- | --- |

11.1.

Every modification of the vehicle type or the belt or restraint system or both shall be notified to the administrative department which approved the vehicle type or safety-belt or restraint system type. The department may then either:

| 11.1.1. | Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle or safety-belt or restraint system still complies with the requirements; or |
| --- | --- |

11.1.1.

Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle or safety-belt or restraint system still complies with the requirements; or

| 11.1.2. | Require a further test report from the technical service responsible for conducting the tests. |
| --- | --- |

11.1.2.

Require a further test report from the technical service responsible for conducting the tests.

| 11.2. | Without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph 11.1. above, a variant of the vehicle whose mass in the running order is less than that of the vehicle subjected to the approval test shall not be regarded as a modification of the vehicle type. |
| --- | --- |

11.2.

Without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph 11.1. above, a variant of the vehicle whose mass in the running order is less than that of the vehicle subjected to the approval test shall not be regarded as a modification of the vehicle type.

| 11.3. | Confirmation or refusal of approval, specifying the alterations, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 5.2.3. or 5.3.3. above to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

11.3.

Confirmation or refusal of approval, specifying the alterations, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 5.2.3. or 5.3.3. above to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation.

| 11.4. | The competent authority issuing the extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and inform thereof the other parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1A or 1B to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

11.4.

The competent authority issuing the extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and inform thereof the other parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1A or 1B to this Regulation.

12.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture a device approved in accordance with this Regulation, he shall so inform the authority which granted the approval. Upon receiving the relevant communication that authority shall inform thereof the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1A or 1B to this Regulation.

13.   INSTRUCTIONS

In the case of safety-belt type supplied separately from vehicle, the packaging and installation instructions must clearly state the vehicle type(s) for which it is intended.

14.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING APPROVAL TESTS, AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

The Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or refusal or extension or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

15.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

15.1.   Approvals of vehicle type

| 15.1.1. | As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.1.1.

As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 15.1.2. | As from 2 years after the entry into force of Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant ECE approvals only if the requirements of this Regulation, as amended by Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments are satisfied. |
| --- | --- |

15.1.2.

As from 2 years after the entry into force of Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant ECE approvals only if the requirements of this Regulation, as amended by Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments are satisfied.

| 15.1.3. | As from 7 years after the entry into force of Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals which were not granted in accordance with Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation. However, existing approvals of the vehicle categories other than M1 and which are not affected by Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation shall remain valid and Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall continue to accept them. |
| --- | --- |

15.1.3.

As from 7 years after the entry into force of Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals which were not granted in accordance with Supplement 15 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation. However, existing approvals of the vehicle categories other than M1

| 15.1.3.1. | However, as from 1 October 2000, for vehicles of categories M1 and N1, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize ECE approvals which were not granted in accordance with Supplement 8 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation, if the information requirements of paragraph 8.3.5 and Annex 17 are not met. |
| --- | --- |

15.1.3.1.

However, as from 1 October 2000, for vehicles of categories M1

1

15.2.   Installation of safety-belts

These transitional provisions only apply to the installation of safety-belts on vehicles and do not change the mark of the safety-belt.

| 15.2.1. | As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.1.

As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 15.2.2. | Upon expiration of a period of 36 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.1 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approval only if the vehicle type satisfies the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.2.

Upon expiration of a period of 36 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.1 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approval only if the vehicle type satisfies the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 15.2.3. | Upon the expiration of a period of 60 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.1 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals not granted in accordance with Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.3.

Upon the expiration of a period of 60 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.1 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals not granted in accordance with Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 15.2.4. | As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant UNECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.4.

As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant UNECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 15.2.5. | As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.5.

As from the official date of entry into force of Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant ECE approvals under this Regulation as modified by Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 15.2.6. | Upon expiration of a period of 36 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.4 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approval only if the vehicle type satisfies the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.6.

Upon expiration of a period of 36 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.4 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approval only if the vehicle type satisfies the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 15.2.7. | Upon the expiration of a period of 60 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.4 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals not granted in accordance with Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.7.

Upon the expiration of a period of 60 months following the official date of entry into force referred to in paragraph 15.2.4 above, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals not granted in accordance with Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 15.2.8. | After 16 July 2006, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approval only if the vehicle type satisfies the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

15.2.8.

After 16 July 2006, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approval only if the vehicle type satisfies the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 1.5.2.9. | After 16 July 2008, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals to vehicles of category N1 not granted in accordance with Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.2.9.

After 16 July 2008, the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse to recognize approvals to vehicles of category N1 not granted in accordance with Supplement 16 to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation.

---

(*1)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), Annex 7 (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

*1

(*2)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), Annex 7 (TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

*2

(1)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Serbia and Montenegro, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35 (vacant), 36 for Lithuania, 37 for Turkey, 38 (vacant), 39 for Azerbaijan, 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine, 47 for South Africa, 48 for New Zealand, 49 for Cyprus, 50 for Malta and 51 for the Republic of Korea. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

1

(2)  See the footnote to paragraph 5.2.4.1.

2

(3)  g = 9,81 m/s2

3

2

(*3)  See paragraph 7.4.1.6.4.3.

*3

(4)  g = 9,81 m/s2

4

2

(*4)  Document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2.

*4

---

ANNEX 1A

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

Image 39

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval (see approval provisions in the Regulation).

(2) Strike out what does not apply.

concerning (2): APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a vehicle type with regard to safety-belt pursuant to Regulation No 16

Approval No: Extension No:

1. General

1.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer):

1.2. Type and general commercial description(s):

1.3. Means of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle:

1.3.1. Location of that marking:

1.4. Category of vehicle:

1.5. Name and address of manufacturer:

1.6. Address(es) of assembly plant(s):

2. General construction characteristics of the vehicle

2.1. Photographs and/or drawings of a representative vehicle:

3. Bodywork

3.1. Seats

3.1.1. Number:

3.1.2. Position and arrangement:

3.1.2.1. Seating position(s) designated for use only when the vehicle is stationary:

3.1.3. Characteristics: description and drawings of

3.1.3.1. the seats and their anchorages:

3.1.3.2. the adjustment system:

3.1.3.3. the displacement and locking systems:

3.1.3.4. the seat belt anchorages if incorporated in the seat structure:

issued by: Name of administration:

Image 40

3.2. Safety-belts and/or other restraint systems

3.2.1. Number and position of safety-belts and restraint systems and seats on which they can be used:

Complete ECE type- approval mark

Variant (if applicable)

Belt adjustment device for height (indicate yes/no/optional)

First row of seat

R

C

L

Second row of seat

R

C

L

(R = right-hand seat, C = centre seat, L = left hand seat)

3.2.2. Nature and position of supplementary restraint systems (indicate yes/no/optional).

Front airbag

Side airbag

Belt preloading device

First row of seat

R

C

L

Second row of seat

R

C

L

(R = right-hand seat, C = centre seat, L = left hand seat)

3.2.3. Number and position of safety-belt anchorages and proof of compliance with Regulation No 14 (i.e. ECE type-approval number or test report).

4. Place

5. Date

6. Signature

---

ANNEX 1B

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

Image 41

issued by : Name of administration:

concerning (2): APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a type of safety-belt or restraint system for adult occupants of power-driven vehicles pursuant to Regulation No 16

Approval No Extension No

1. Restraint system (with)/three-point belt/lap belt/special type belt/fitted (with) energy absorber/retractor/device for height adjustment of the upper pillar loop (3)

2. Trade name or mark

3. Manufacturer's designation of the type of belt or restraining system

4. Manufacturer's name

5. If applicable, name of his representative

6. Address

7. Submitted for approval on

8. Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests

9. Date of test report issued by that service

10. Number of test report issued by that service

11. Approval granted/refused/extended/withdrawn (2) for general use/for use in a particular vehicle or in particular types of vehicles (2) (4)

12. Position and nature of the marking

13. Place

14. Date

15. Signature

16. Annexed to this communication is a list of documents in the approval file deposited at the administration services having delivered the approval and which can be obtained upon request.

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval (see approval provisions in the Regulation).

(2) Strike out what does not apply.

(3) Indicate which type.

(4) If a safety-belt is approved following the provisions of paragraph 6.4.1.3.3. of this Regulation, this safety-belt shall only be installed in an outboard front seating position protected by an airbag in front of it, under the condition that the vehicle concerned is approved to Regulation No 94, 01 series of amendments or its later version in force, or to the European Community Directive 96/79/EC.

---

ANNEX 2

ARRANGEMENTS OF THE APPROVAL MARKS

| 1. | Arrangements of the vehicle approval marks concerning the installation of safety-belts
  Model A
  (See paragraph 5.2.4. of this Regulation)



  a = 8 mm min.
  The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has, with regard to safety-belts, been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulation No 16. The approval number indicates that the approval was granted according to the requirements of Regulation No 16 as amended by the 04 series of amendments.
  Model B
  (See paragraph 5.2.5. of this Regulation)



  a = 8 mm min.
  The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulations Nos. 16 and 52. (1) The approval numbers indicate that, at the dates when the respective approvals were given, Regulation No 16 included the 04 series of amendments and Regulation No 52 the 01 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

1.

Model A

(See paragraph 5.2.4. of this Regulation)

a = 8 mm min.

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has, with regard to safety-belts, been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulation No 16. The approval number indicates that the approval was granted according to the requirements of Regulation No 16 as amended by the 04 series of amendments.

Model B

(See paragraph 5.2.5. of this Regulation)

a = 8 mm min.

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulations Nos. 16 and 52. (1) The approval numbers indicate that, at the dates when the respective approvals were given, Regulation No 16 included the 04 series of amendments and Regulation No 52 the 01 series of amendments.

| 2. | Arrangements of the safety-belt approval marks (See paragraph 5.3.5. of this Regulation)





  a = 8 mm min.
  The belt bearing the above approval mark is a three-point belt (A), fitted with an energy absorber (‘e’) and approved in the Netherlands (E4) under the number 042439, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval.





  The belt bearing the above approval mark is a lap belt (‘B’), fitted with a retractor, type 4, with multiple sensitivity (m) and approved in the Netherlands (E4) under the number 042489, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval.







  Note: | The approval number and additional symbol(s) must be placed close to the circle and either above or below the ‘E’ or to left or right of that letter. The digits of the approval number must be on the same side of the ‘E’ and orientated in the same direction. The additional symbol(s) must be diametrically opposite the approval number. The use of roman numerals as approval numbers should be avoided so as to prevent any confusion with other symbols. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.

Image 44

a = 8 mm min.

The belt bearing the above approval mark is a three-point belt (A), fitted with an energy absorber (‘e’) and approved in the Netherlands (E4) under the number 042439, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval.

Image 45

The belt bearing the above approval mark is a lap belt (‘B’), fitted with a retractor, type 4, with multiple sensitivity (m) and approved in the Netherlands (E4) under the number 042489, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval.

Note:

Image 46

The belt bearing the above approval mark is a special type belt (S), fitted with an energy absorber (e) and approved in the Netherlands (E4) under the number 0422439, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval.

Image 47

The belt bearing the above approval mark is part of a restraint system (Z), it is a special type belt (S) fitted with an energy absorber (e). It has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) under the number 0424391, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval.

Image 48

a = 8 mm min.

Image 49

The belt bearing this type-approval mark is a three-point belt (A) with a multiple-sensitivity (m) type 4N (r4N) retractor, in respect of which type-approval was granted in the Netherlands (E4) under number 042439, the Regulation already incorporating the 04 series of amendments at the time of approval. This belt shall not be fitted to vehicles of category M1.

Image 50

The safety-belt bearing this type-approval mark is a three-point belt (A) fitted with an energy absorber (e), approved as meeting the specific requirements of paragraph 6.4.1.3.3. of this Regulation, and with a multiple-sensitivity (m) type 4 (r4) retractor, in respect of which type approval was granted in the Netherlands (‘E4’) under the approval number 042439. The first two digits indicate that the Regulation already incorporated the 04 series of amendments at the time of the approval. This safety-belt has to be fitted to a vehicle equipped with an airbag in the given seating position.

---

(1)  The second number is given merely as an example.

---

ANNEX 3

DIAGRAM OF AN APPARATUS TO TEST DURABILITY OF RETRACTOR MECHANISM

Retractor

Geared motor

---

ANNEX 4

DIAGRAM OF AN APPARATUS TO TEST LOCKING OF EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTORS

A suitable apparatus is illustrated in the figure and consists of a motor-driven cam, the follower of which is attached by wires to a small trolley mounted on a track. The cam design and motor speed combination is such as to give the required acceleration at a rate of increase of acceleration as specified in paragraph 7.6.2.2 of this Regulation and the stroke is arranged to be in excess of the maximum permitted webbing movement before locking.

On the trolley a carrier is mounted which can be swivelled to enable the retractor to be mounted in varying positions relative to the direction of movement of the trolley.

When testing retractors for sensitivity to strap movement the retractor is mounted on a suitable fixed bracket and the strap is attached to the trolley.

When carrying out the above tests any brackets, etc. supplied by the manufacturer or his accredited representative shall be incorporated in the test installation to simulate as closely as possible the intended installation in a vehicle.

Any additional brackets, etc. that may be required to simulate the installation as intended in the vehicle shall be provided by the manufacturer or his accredited representative.

Retractor

---

ANNEX 5

DIAGRAM OF AN APPARATUS FOR DUST-RESISTANCE TEST

(dimensions in millimetres)

retractor

cycling attachment

dust collector

retractor

orifice

valve and filler

air

dust

---

ANNEX 6

DESCRIPTION OF TROLLEY, SEAT, ANCHORAGES AND STOPPING DEVICE

1.   TROLLEY

For tests on safety-belts the trolley, carrying the seat only, shall have a mass of 400 ± 20 kg. For tests on restraint systems the trolley with the attached vehicle structure shall have a mass of 800 kg. However, if necessary, the total mass of the trolley and vehicle structure may be increased by increments of 200 kg. In no case shall the total mass differ from the nominal value by more than ± 40 kg.

2.   SEAT

Except in the case of tests on restraint systems, the seat shall be of rigid construction and present a smooth surface. The particulars given in figure 1 to this annex shall be respected, care being taken that no metal part can come into contact with the belt.

3.   ANCHORAGES

| 3.1. | In the case of a belt equipped with a belt adjustment device for height as defined in paragraph 29.6 of this Regulation, this device shall be secured either to a rigid frame, or to a part of the vehicle on which it is normally mounted which shall be securely fixed on the test trolley. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.2. | The anchorages shall be positioned as shown in figure 1. The marks which correspond to the arrangement of the anchorages show where the ends of the belt are to be connected to the trolley or to the load transducer, as the case may be. The anchorages for normal use are the points A, B and K if the strap length between the upper edge of the buckle and the hole for attachment of the strap support is not more than 250 mm. Otherwise, the points A1 and B1 shall be used. The tolerance on the position of the anchorage points is such that each anchorage point shall be situated at most at 50 mm from corresponding points A, B and K indicated in figure 1 or A1, B1 and K, as the case may be. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

| 3.3. | The structure carrying the anchorages shall be rigid. The upper anchorage must not be displaced by more than 0,2 mm in the longitudinal direction when a load of 98 daN is applied to it in that direction. The trolley shall be so constructed that no permanent deformation shall occur in the parts bearing the anchorages during the test. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

| 3.4. | If a fourth anchorage is necessary to attach the retractor, this anchorage:






  — | shall be located in the vertical longitudinal plane passing through K; |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.4.

—

shall be located in the vertical longitudinal plane passing through K;

| — | shall enable the retractor to be tilted to the angle prescribed by the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

—

shall enable the retractor to be tilted to the angle prescribed by the manufacturer;

| — | shall be located on the arc of a circle with radius KB1 = 790 mm if the length between the upper strap guide and the strap outlet at the retractor is not less than 540 mm or, in all other cases, on the arc of a circle with centre K and radius 350 mm. |
| --- | --- |

—

shall be located on the arc of a circle with radius KB1 = 790 mm if the length between the upper strap guide and the strap outlet at the retractor is not less than 540 mm or, in all other cases, on the arc of a circle with centre K and radius 350 mm.

4.   STOPPING DEVICE

| 4.1. | The device consists of two identical absorbers mounted in parallel, except in the case of restraint systems when four absorbers shall be used for a nominal mass of 800 kg. If necessary, an additional absorber shall be used for each 200 kg increase of nominal mass. Each absorber comprises:






  — | an outer casing formed from a steel tube, |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.1.

—

an outer casing formed from a steel tube,

| — | a polyurethane energy-absorber tube, |
| --- | --- |

—

a polyurethane energy-absorber tube,

| — | a polished-steel olive-shaped knob penetrating into the absorber, and |
| --- | --- |

—

a polished-steel olive-shaped knob penetrating into the absorber, and

| — | a shaft and an impact plate. |
| --- | --- |

—

a shaft and an impact plate.

| 4.2. | The dimensions of the various parts of this absorber are shown in the diagrams reproduced in figures 2, 3 and 4. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

| 4.3. | The characteristics of the absorbing material are given in table 1 of this annex. Immediately before each test the tubes shall be conditioned at a temperature between 15o and 25 oC for at least 12 hours without being used. During the dynamic testing of safety-belts or restraint systems, the stopping device shall be at the same temperature as during the calibration test, with a tolerance of ± 2 oC. The requirements to be met by the stopping device are given in Annex 8 to this Regulation. Any other device giving equivalent results may be used.
  Table 1
  Characteristics of the absorbing material

  (ASTM Method D 735 unless otherwise stated)







  Shore hardness A: | 95 ± 2 at 20 ± 5 oC temperature |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Breaking strength: | Ro > 343 daN/cm2 |
| Minimum elongation: | Ao > 400 per cent |
| Module at 100 per cent elongation: | > 108 daN/cm2 |
| Module at 300 per cent elongation: | > 235 daN/cm2 |
| Low-temperature brittleness (ASTM Method D 736): | 5 hours at - 55 oC |
| Compression set (Method B): | 22 hours at 70 oC < 45 per cent |
| Density at 25 oC: | between 1,05 and 1,10 |

4.3.

Table 1

Characteristics of the absorbing material

(ASTM Method D 735 unless otherwise stated)

Shore hardness A:

95 ± 2 at 20 ± 5 oC temperature

Breaking strength:

Ro > 343 daN/cm2

Minimum elongation:

Ao > 400 per cent

Module at 100 per cent elongation:

> 108 daN/cm2

Module at 300 per cent elongation:

> 235 daN/cm2

Low-temperature brittleness (ASTM Method D 736):

5 hours at - 55 oC

Compression set (Method B):

22 hours at 70 oC < 45 per cent

Density at 25 oC:

between 1,05 and 1,10

Ageing in air (ASTM Method D 573)

| 70 hours at 100 oC | — | Shore-A-hardness: max variation ± 3 |
| --- | --- | --- |

70 hours at 100 oC

—

Shore-A-hardness: max variation ± 3

| — | breaking strength: decrease < 10 per cent of Ro |
| --- | --- |

—

breaking strength: decrease < 10 per cent of Ro

| — | elongation: decrease < 10 per cent of Ao |
| --- | --- |

—

elongation: decrease < 10 per cent of Ao

| — | mass: decrease < 1 per cent |
| --- | --- |

—

mass: decrease < 1 per cent

Immersion in oil (ASTM Method No 1 Oil):

| 70 hours at 100 oC | — | Shore-A-hardness: max variation ± 4 |
| --- | --- | --- |

70 hours at 100 oC

—

Shore-A-hardness: max variation ± 4

| — | breaking strength: decrease < 15 per cent of Ro |
| --- | --- |

—

breaking strength: decrease < 15 per cent of Ro

| — | elongation: decrease < 10 per cent of Ao |
| --- | --- |

—

elongation: decrease < 10 per cent of Ao

| — | volume: swelling < 5 per cent |
| --- | --- |

—

volume: swelling < 5 per cent

Immersion in oil (ASTM Method No 3 Oil):

| 70 hours at 100 oC | — | breaking strength: decrease < 15 per cent of Ro |
| --- | --- | --- |

70 hours at 100 oC

—

breaking strength: decrease < 15 per cent of Ro

| — | elongation: decrease < 15 per cent of Ao |
| --- | --- |

—

elongation: decrease < 15 per cent of Ao

| — | volume: swelling < 20 per cent |
| --- | --- |

—

volume: swelling < 20 per cent

Immersion in distilled water:

| 1 week at 70 oC | — | breaking strength: decrease < 35 per cent of Ro |
| --- | --- | --- |

1 week at 70 oC

—

breaking strength: decrease < 35 per cent of Ro

| — | elongation: increase < 20 per cent of Ao. |
| --- | --- |

—

elongation: increase < 20 per cent of Ao.

Figure 1

Trolley, seat, anchorage

Stainless steel plate

(without painting)

Dimensions in millimeters

Tolerances: ± 5 mm

Figure 2

Stopping device

steel tube on trolley

polyurethane tube

olive-shaped knob

for details see Fig. 2

for details see Fig. 3

shaft

Play defined according to external diameter of the polyurethane tube (light push fit)

Figure 3

Stopping device

(Polyurethane tube)(Assembled)

material A

| Surface finish of mandrell | | Interference tolerance ±0,2
  All dimensions in mm |
| --- | --- | --- |

Surface finish of mandrell

Formula

Interference tolerance ±0,2

All dimensions in mm

Figure 4

Stopping device

(Olive-shaped knob)

(*) This dimension can vary between 43 and 49 mm

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm

| Surface finish | | Interference tolerance ±0,1 |
| --- | --- | --- |

Surface finish

Formula

Interference tolerance ±0,1

---

ANNEX 7

DESCRIPTION OF MANIKIN

1.   SPECIFICATIONS OF THE MANIKIN

1.1.   General

The main characteristics of the manikin are illustrated in the following figures and tables:

| Figure 1 | Side view of head, neck and torso; |
| --- | --- |
| Figure 2 | Front view of head, neck and torso; |
| Figure 3 | Side view of hip, thighs and lower leg; |
| Figure 4 | Front view of hip, thighs and lower leg; |
| Figure 5 | Principal dimensions; |
| Figure 6 | Manikin in sitting position, showing: | location of the centre of gravity; |

Figure 1

Side view of head, neck and torso;

Figure 2

Front view of head, neck and torso;

Figure 3

Side view of hip, thighs and lower leg;

Figure 4

Front view of hip, thighs and lower leg;

Figure 5

Principal dimensions;

Figure 6

Manikin in sitting position, showing:

location of the centre of gravity;

| | location of points at which displacement shall be measured; and |
| --- | --- |

location of points at which displacement shall be measured; and

| | shoulder height. |
| --- | --- |

shoulder height.

Table 1

References, names, materials and principal dimensions of components of the manikin; and

Table 2

Masses of head, neck, torso, thighs and lower leg.

1.2.   Description of the manikin

1.2.1.   Structure of the lower leg (see Figures 3 and 4)

The structure of the lower leg consists of three components:

| — | a sole plate (30); |
| --- | --- |

—

a sole plate (30);

| — | a shin tube (29); and |
| --- | --- |

—

a shin tube (29); and

| — | a knee tube (26). |
| --- | --- |

—

a knee tube (26).

The knee tube has two lugs which limit the movement of the lower leg in relation to the thigh.

The lower leg can be rotated rearwards 120o from the straight position.

1.2.2.   Structure of the thigh (see Figures 3 and 4)

The structure of the thigh consists of three components:

| — | knee tube (22), |
| --- | --- |

—

knee tube (22),

| — | a thigh bar (21), and |
| --- | --- |

—

a thigh bar (21), and

| — | a hip tube (20). |
| --- | --- |

—

a hip tube (20).

Movement of the knee is limited by two cut-outs in the knee tube (22) which engage with the lugs of the lower leg.

1.2.3.   Structure of the torso (see Figures 1 and 2)

The structure of the torso consists of:

| — | a hip tube (2), |
| --- | --- |

—

a hip tube (2),

| — | a roller chain (4), |
| --- | --- |

—

a roller chain (4),

| — | ribs (6) and (7), |
| --- | --- |

—

ribs (6) and (7),

| — | a sternum (8), and |
| --- | --- |

—

a sternum (8), and

| — | chain attachments (3) and at parts (7) and (8). |
| --- | --- |

—

chain attachments (3) and at parts (7) and (8).

1.2.4.   Neck (see Figures 1 and 2)

The neck consists of seven polyurethane discs (9). The stiffness of the neck can be adjusted by means of a chain tensioner.

1.2.5.   Head (see Figures 1 and 2)

The head (15) itself is hollow; the polyurethane form is reinforced by steel plate (17). The chain tensioner by which the neck can be adjusted consists of a polyamide block (10), a tubular spacer (11), and tensioning members (12) and (13). The head can be turned about the Atlas-Axis joint, which consists of the adjuster assembly (14) and (18), the spacer (16), and polyamide block (10).

1.2.6.   Knee joint (see Figure 4)

The lower leg and thighs are connected by a tube (27) and a tensioner (28).

1.2.7.   Hip joint (see Figure 4)

The thighs and torso are connected by a tube (23), friction plates (24), and tensioner assembly (25).

1.2.8.   Polyurethane

| Type | : | PU 123 CH Compound |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Hardness | : | 50-60 Shore A |

Type

:

PU 123 CH Compound

Hardness

:

50-60 Shore A

1.2.9.   Overalls

The manikin is covered by a special overall (see table 1).

2.   CORRECTION DEVICES

2.1.   General

In order to calibrate the manikin to certain values and its total mass, the mass distribution are adjusted by the use of six correction steel masses of 1 kg each, which can be mounted at the hip joint. Six polyurethane weights each of 1 kg mass can be mounted in the back of the torso.

3.   CUSHION

A cushion must be positioned between the chest of the manikin and the overall. This cushion shall be made of polyethylene foam of the following specification:

| — | Hardness: |
| --- | --- |

—

Hardness:

7-10 shore A

| — | Thickness: |
| --- | --- |

—

Thickness:

25 mm ± 5

It shall be replaceable.

4.   ADJUSTMENT OF THE JOINTS

4.1.   General

In order to achieve reproducible results, it is necessary to specify and control the friction at each joint.

4.2.   Knee joint

Tighten the knee joint.

Set the thigh and lower leg vertical.

Rotate the lower leg through 30o.

Gradually slacken the tensioner (28) until the lower leg starts to fall under its own mass.

Lock the tensioner in this position.

4.3.   Hip joint

Tighten the hip joint.

Place the thigh in a horizontal position and the torso in a vertical position.

Rotate the torso in a forward direction until the angle between the torso and the thigh is 60o.

Gradually slacken the tensioner until the torso starts to fall under its own mass.

Lock the tensioner in this position.

4.4.   Atlas-Axis joint

Adjust the Atlas-Axis joint so that it just resists its own weight in the fore and aft directions.

4.5.   Neck

The neck can be adjusted by means of the chain tensioner (13). When the neck is adjusted, the upper end of the tensioner shall displace between 4—6 cm when subjected to a horizontal load of 10 daN.

Table 1

| Reference No | Name | Material | Dimensions |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| 1 | Body material | Polyurethane | — |
| 2 | Hip tube | Steel | 76 × 70 × 100 mm |
| 3 | Chain attachments | Steel | 25 × 10 × 70 mm |
| 4 | Roller chain | Steel | 3/4 |
| 5 | Shoulder plate | Polyurethane | — |
| 6 | Rolled section | Steel | 30 × 30 ×3 × 250 mm |
| 7 | Ribs | Perforated steel plate | 400 × 85 × 1,5  mm |
| 8 | Sternum | Perforated steel plate | 250 × 90 × 1,5  mm |
| 9 | Discs (six) | Polyurethane | ø 90 × 20 mm |
| | | | ø 80 × 20 mm |
| | | | ø 75 × 20 mm |
| | | | ø 70 × 20 mm |
| | | | ø 65 × 20 mm |
| | | | ø 60 × 20 mm |
| 10 | Block | Polyamide | 60 × 60 × 25 mm |
| 11 | Tubular spacer | Steel | 40 × 40 × 2 × 50 mm |
| 12 | Tensioning bolt | Steel | M16 × 90 mm |
| 13 | Tensioner nut | Steel | M16 |
| 14 | Tensioner for Atlas-Axis joint | Steel | ø 12 × 130 mm (M12) |
| 15 | Head | Polyurethane | — |
| 16 | Tubular spacer | Steel | ø 18 × 13 × 17 mm |
| 17 | Reinforcement plate | Steel | 30 × 3 × 500 mm |
| 18 | Tensioner nut | Steel | M12 mm |
| 19 | Thighs | Polyurethane | — |
| 20 | Hip tube | Steel | 76 × 70 × 80 mm |
| 21 | Thigh bar | Steel | 30 × 30 × 440 mm |
| 22 | Knee tube | Steel | 52 × 46 × 40 mm |
| 23 | Hip connection tube | Steel | 70 × 64 × 250 mm |
| 24 | Friction plates (four) | Steel | 160 × 75 × 1 mm |
| 25 | Tensioner assembly | Steel | M12 × 320 mm + |
| | | | Plates and nuts |
| 26 | Knee tube | Steel | 52 × 46 × 160 |
| 27 | Knee connection tube | Steel | 44 × 39 × 190 mm |
| 28 | Tensioner plate | Steel | ø 70 × 4 mm |
| 29 | Shin tube | Steel | 50 × 50 × 2 × 460 mm |
| 30 | Sole plate | Steel | 100 × 170 × 3 mm |
| 31 | Torso correction mass (six) | Polyurethane | Each mass 1 kg |
| 32 | Cushion | Polystyrene foam | 350 × 250 × 25 mm |
| 33 | Overall | Cotton and polyamide straps | — |
| 34 | Hip correction masses (six) | Steel | Each mass 1 kg |

Reference No

Name

Material

Dimensions

1

Body material

Polyurethane

—

2

Hip tube

Steel

76 × 70 × 100 mm

3

Chain attachments

Steel

25 × 10 × 70 mm

4

Roller chain

Steel

3/4

5

Shoulder plate

Polyurethane

—

6

Rolled section

Steel

30 × 30 ×3 × 250 mm

7

Ribs

Perforated steel plate

400 × 85 × 1,5  mm

8

Sternum

Perforated steel plate

250 × 90 × 1,5  mm

9

Discs (six)

Polyurethane

ø 90 × 20 mm

ø 80 × 20 mm

ø 75 × 20 mm

ø 70 × 20 mm

ø 65 × 20 mm

ø 60 × 20 mm

10

Block

Polyamide

60 × 60 × 25 mm

11

Tubular spacer

Steel

40 × 40 × 2 × 50 mm

12

Tensioning bolt

Steel

M16 × 90 mm

13

Tensioner nut

Steel

M16

14

Tensioner for Atlas-Axis joint

Steel

ø 12 × 130 mm (M12)

15

Head

Polyurethane

—

16

Tubular spacer

Steel

ø 18 × 13 × 17 mm

17

Reinforcement plate

Steel

30 × 3 × 500 mm

18

Tensioner nut

Steel

M12 mm

19

Thighs

Polyurethane

—

20

Hip tube

Steel

76 × 70 × 80 mm

21

Thigh bar

Steel

30 × 30 × 440 mm

22

Knee tube

Steel

52 × 46 × 40 mm

23

Hip connection tube

Steel

70 × 64 × 250 mm

24

Friction plates (four)

Steel

160 × 75 × 1 mm

25

Tensioner assembly

Steel

M12 × 320 mm +

Plates and nuts

26

Knee tube

Steel

52 × 46 × 160

27

Knee connection tube

Steel

44 × 39 × 190 mm

28

Tensioner plate

Steel

ø 70 × 4 mm

29

Shin tube

Steel

50 × 50 × 2 × 460 mm

30

Sole plate

Steel

100 × 170 × 3 mm

31

Torso correction mass (six)

Polyurethane

Each mass 1 kg

32

Cushion

Polystyrene foam

350 × 250 × 25 mm

33

Overall

Cotton and polyamide straps

—

34

Hip correction masses (six)

Steel

Each mass 1 kg

Table 2

| Components of manikin | Mass in kg |
| --- | --- |
| Head and neck | 4,6 ±0,3 |
| Torso and arms | 40,3 ±1,0 |
| Thighs | 16,2 ±0,5 |
| Lower leg and foot | 9,0 ±0,5 |
| Total mass including correction weights | 75,5 ±1,0 |

Components of manikin

Mass in kg

Head and neck

4,6 ±0,3

Torso and arms

40,3 ±1,0

Thighs

16,2 ±0,5

Lower leg and foot

9,0 ±0,5

Total mass including correction weights

75,5 ±1,0

| Figure 1 | Figure 2 |
| --- | --- |

Figure 1

Image 59

Figure 2

Image 60

| Figure 3 | Figure 4 |
| --- | --- |

Figure 3

Image 61

Figure 4

Image 62

Figure 5

Figure 6

All dimensions in mm

| G | = | centre of gravity |
| --- | --- | --- |
| T | = | torso reference point (at the rear on the centre line of the manikin) |
| P | = | pelvis reference point (at the rear on the centre line of the manikin) |

G

=

centre of gravity

T

=

torso reference point (at the rear on the centre line of the manikin)

P

=

pelvis reference point (at the rear on the centre line of the manikin)

The displacement measurement at point P shall not contain rotational components around the hip axis and around a vertical axis.

---

ANNEX 8

DESCRIPTION OF CURVE OF TROLLEY'S DECELERATION AS A FUNCTION OF TIME

(Curve for testing stopping devices)

The deceleration curve of the trolley weighted with inert mass to produce a total mass of 455 kg ± 20 kg for safety-belt tests and 910 ± 40 kg for restraining system tests where the nominal mass of the trolley and vehicle structure is 800 kg must remain within the hatched area above. If necessary, the nominal mass of the trolley and attached vehicle structure can be increased by increments of 200 kg, in which case, an additional inert mass of 28 kg per increment shall be added. In no case shall the total mass of the trolley and vehicle structure and inert masses differ from the nominal value for calibration tests by more than ± 40 kg. During calibration of the stopping device, the speed of the trolley shall be 50 km/h ± 1 km/h and the stopping distance shall be 40 cm ± 2 cm. In both the above cases the calibration and measuring procedures shall correspond to those defined in the International Standard ISO 6487:1980; the measuring equipment shall correspond to the specification of a data channel with a channel frequency class (CFC) 60.

---

ANNEX 9

INSTRUCTIONS

Every safety-belt shall be accompanied by instructions of the following content or kind in the language or languages of the country in which it is to be placed on sale:

| 1. | Installation instructions (not required if the vehicle manufacturer is to install the safety-belt) which specify for which vehicle models the assembly is suitable and the correct method of attachment of the assembly to the vehicle, including a warning to guard against chafing of the straps. |
| --- | --- |

1.

Installation instructions (not required if the vehicle manufacturer is to install the safety-belt) which specify for which vehicle models the assembly is suitable and the correct method of attachment of the assembly to the vehicle, including a warning to guard against chafing of the straps.

| 2. | User instructions (may be included in the vehicle user's handbook if the safety-belt is installed by the vehicle manufacturer) which specify the instructions to ensure that the user obtains the greatest benefit from the safety-belt. In these instructions reference shall be made to:






  (a) | the importance of wearing the assembly on all journeys; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.

User instructions (may be included in the vehicle user's handbook if the safety-belt is installed by the vehicle manufacturer) which specify the instructions to ensure that the user obtains the greatest benefit from the safety-belt. In these instructions reference shall be made to:

(a)

the importance of wearing the assembly on all journeys;

| (b) | the correct manner of wearing the belt and in particular to:






  — | the intended location of the buckle; |
| --- | --- | --- |

(b)

the correct manner of wearing the belt and in particular to:

—

the intended location of the buckle;

| — | the desirability of wearing belts tightly; |
| --- | --- |

—

the desirability of wearing belts tightly;

| — | the correct positioning of the straps and the need to avoid twisting them; |
| --- | --- |

—

the correct positioning of the straps and the need to avoid twisting them;

| — | the importance of each belt being used by one occupant only, and especially of not putting a belt around a child seated on the occupant's lap; |
| --- | --- |

—

the importance of each belt being used by one occupant only, and especially of not putting a belt around a child seated on the occupant's lap;

| (c) | the method of operating the buckle; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

the method of operating the buckle;

| (d) | the method of operating the adjuster; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

the method of operating the adjuster;

| (e) | the method of operating any retractor which may be incorporated in the assembly and the method of checking that it locks; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

the method of operating any retractor which may be incorporated in the assembly and the method of checking that it locks;

| (f) | the recommended methods of cleaning the belt and reassembling it after cleaning where appropriate; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

the recommended methods of cleaning the belt and reassembling it after cleaning where appropriate;

| (g) | the need to replace the safety-belt when it has been used in a severe accident or shows signs of severe fraying or having been cut, or when, with a belt fitted with a visual overload indicator, it indicates the belt's unsuitability for further use or when a seat-belt is equipped with a pre-loading device, when the latter has been activated; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

the need to replace the safety-belt when it has been used in a severe accident or shows signs of severe fraying or having been cut, or when, with a belt fitted with a visual overload indicator, it indicates the belt's unsuitability for further use or when a seat-belt is equipped with a pre-loading device, when the latter has been activated;

| (h) | the fact that the belt must not be altered or modified in any way since such changes may render the belt ineffective, and in particular where the design permits part to be disassembled, instructions or ensure correct reassembly; |
| --- | --- |

(h)

the fact that the belt must not be altered or modified in any way since such changes may render the belt ineffective, and in particular where the design permits part to be disassembled, instructions or ensure correct reassembly;

| (i) | the fact that the belt is intended for use by adult-sized occupants; |
| --- | --- |

(i)

the fact that the belt is intended for use by adult-sized occupants;

| (j) | the stowage of the belt when not in use. |
| --- | --- |

(j)

the stowage of the belt when not in use.

| 3. | In the case of safety-belts fitted with a type 4N retractor, it shall be indicated in the installation instructions and on any packaging that this belt is not suitable for installation in motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers having not more than nine seats, including that of the driver. |
| --- | --- |

3.

In the case of safety-belts fitted with a type 4N retractor, it shall be indicated in the installation instructions and on any packaging that this belt is not suitable for installation in motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers having not more than nine seats, including that of the driver.

| 4. | An installation requirement for the consumer shall be provided by the manufacturer/applicant for all vehicles where the crotch strap assembly can be used. The manufacturer of the harness belt shall prescribe the mounting of the additional reinforcement elements for the anchorages of crotch straps and their installation in all vehicles where an installation is provided for. |
| --- | --- |

4.

An installation requirement for the consumer shall be provided by the manufacturer/applicant for all vehicles where the crotch strap assembly can be used. The manufacturer of the harness belt shall prescribe the mounting of the additional reinforcement elements for the anchorages of crotch straps and their installation in all vehicles where an installation is provided for.

---

ANNEX 10

DUAL BUCKLE TEST

Angle to be established during procedure outlined in paragraphs 7.5.5 and 7.7.1.

W = applied load

---

ANNEX 11

ABRASION AND MICROSLIP TEST

Figure 1:

Type I procedure

Examples of test arrangements corresponding to the type of adjusting device

Example a

protective strap for inner bar

support

total travel:

300 ± 20 mm

F = 2,5 daN

Example b

total travel:

300 ± 20 mm

lower stop

rotating pin

Figure 2:

Type 2 procedure

total travel:

300 ± 20 mm

straps in horizontal plans

F = 0,5 daN

Test in a guide or pulley

total travel:

300 ± 20 mm

F = 5 ± 0,05 daN

Figure 3:

Type 3 procedure and micro-slip test

Total travel: 300 ± 20 mm

Adjusting device

Strap attached by stitching

Strap attached by stitching

Taut position

Slack position

Adjusting device

F = 5 daN

F = 5 daN

The load of 5 daN on the testing device shall be vertically guided in such a way as to avoid load-swing and twisting of the strap.

The attaching device shall be fixed to the load of 5 daN in the same manner as in a vehicle.

---

ANNEX 12

CORROSION TEST

1.   TEST APPARATUS

| 1.1. | The apparatus shall consist of a mist chamber, a salt solution reservoir, a supply of suitably conditioned compressed air, one or more atomizing nozzles, sample supports, provision for heating the chamber, and necessary means of control. The size and detail construction of the apparatus shall be optional, provided that the test conditions are met. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

| 1.2. | It is important to ensure that drops of solution accumulated on the ceiling or cover of the chamber do not fall on test samples. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

| 1.3. | Drops of solution which fall from test samples shall not return to the reservoir for respraying. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

| 1.4. | The apparatus shall not be constructed of materials that will affect the corrosiveness of the mist. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

2.   LOCATION OF TEST SAMPLES IN THE MIST CABINET

| 2.1. | Samples, except retractors, shall be supported or suspended between 15o and 30o from the vertical and preferably parallel to the principal direction of horizontal flow of mist through the chamber, based upon the dominant surface being tested. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | Retractors shall be supported or suspended so that the axes of the reel for storing the strap shall be normal to the principal direction of horizontal flow of mist through the chamber. The strap opening in the retractor shall also be facing in this principal direction. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | Each sample shall be placed so as to permit free setting of mist on all samples. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | Each sample shall be so placed as to prevent salt solution from one sample dripping on to any other sample. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

3.   SALT SOLUTION

| 3.1. | The salt solution shall be prepared by dissolving 5 + 1 parts by mass of sodium chloride in 95 parts of distilled water. The salt shall be sodium chloride substantially free of nickel and copper and containing on the dry basis not more than 0,1 per cent of sodium iodide and not more than 0,3 per cent of total impurities. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.2. | The solution shall be such that when atomized at 35 oC the collected solution is in the pH range of 6,5 to 7,2. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

4.   AIR SUPPLY

The compressed air supply to the nozzle or nozzles for atomizing the salt solution shall be free of oil and dirt, and maintained at a pressure between 70 kN/m2 and 170 kN/m2.

5.   CONDITIONS IN THE MIST CHAMBER

| 5.1. | The exposure zone of the mist chamber shall be maintained at 35 ± 5o C. At least two clean mist collectors shall be placed within the exposure zone so that no drops of solution from the test samples or any other sources are collected. The collectors shall be placed near the test samples, one nearest to any nozzle and one furthest from all nozzles. The mist shall be such that for each 80 cm2 of horizontal collecting areas, there is collected in each collector from 1,0 to 2,0 ml of solution per hour when measured over an average of at least 16 hours. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

| 5.2. | The nozzle or nozzles shall be directed or baffled so that the spray does not impinge directly on test samples. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

---

ANNEX 13

ORDER OF TESTS

| PARAGRAPHS | TEST | SAMPLES |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Belt or restraint system No | Strap No |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 |
| 4/6.1.2./6.1.3/6.2.1.1./6.2.2./6.2.3.1./6.3.1.1. | Inspection of belt or restraint system | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 2.21./2.22./6.2.2.2. | Inspection of buckle | X | X | X | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.2.6./6.2.2.7./7.5.1./7.5.5. | Buckle strength test | | | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.3.3./7.5.1. | Strength test on adjusting device (and where necessary retractors) | | | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.4./7.5.2. | Strength test on attachments (and where necessary on retractors) | | | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.2.3./7.5.3. | Low-temperature test on buckle | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.1.4./7.5.4. | Low-temperature impact test on rigid parts | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.3.2./6.2.3.4./7.5.6. | Ease of adjustment | | | | X | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Conditioning/
  testing of belt or restraint system before dynamic test: | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.2.4. | Durability of buckle | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.1.2/7.2. | Corrosion resistance of rigid parts | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Conditioning of retractors: | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.5.2.1./6.2.5.3.1./6.2.5.3.3./7.6.2. | Locking threshold | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.5.2.2./6.2.5.3.2./7.6.4 | Retracting force | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.5.2.3./6.2.5.3.3./7.6.1. | Durability | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.5.2.3./6.2.5.3.3./7.2. | Corrosion | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.5.2.3./6.2.5.3.3./7.6.3. | Dust | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.3.1.2./7.4.2.3. | Testing of strap width | | | | | | X | X | | | | | | | | | |
| | Strap strength test after: | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.3.2./7.4.1.1./7.4.2. | Room conditioning | | | | | | X | X | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.3.3./7.4.1.2./7.4.2. | Light conditioning | | | | | | | | X | X | | | | | | | |
| 6.3.3./7.4.1.3./7.4.2. | Low -temperature conditioning | | | | | | | | | | X | X | | | | | |
| 6.3.3./7.4.1.4./7.4.2. | Heat conditioning | | | | | | | | | | | | X | X | | | |
| 6.3.3./7.4.1.5./7.4.2. | Water conditioning | | | | | | | | | | | | | | X | X | |
| 6.2.3.2/7.3. | Microslip test | | | | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.4.2./7.4.1.6. | Abrasion test | | | | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.4.1./7.7. | Dynamic test | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 6.2.2.5./6.2.2.7./7.8. | Buckle-opening test | X | X | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| 7.1.4. | Retention of strap sample | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | X |

PARAGRAPHS

TEST

SAMPLES

Belt or restraint system No

Strap No

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

4/6.1.2./6.1.3/6.2.1.1./6.2.2./6.2.3.1./6.3.1.1.

Inspection of belt or restraint system

X

2.21./2.22./6.2.2.2.

Inspection of buckle

X

X

X

X

X

6.2.2.6./6.2.2.7./7.5.1./7.5.5.

Buckle strength test

X

6.2.3.3./7.5.1.

Strength test on adjusting device (and where necessary retractors)

X

6.2.4./7.5.2.

Strength test on attachments (and where necessary on retractors)

X

6.2.2.3./7.5.3.

Low-temperature test on buckle

X

X

6.2.1.4./7.5.4.

Low-temperature impact test on rigid parts

X

X

6.2.3.2./6.2.3.4./7.5.6.

Ease of adjustment

X

Conditioning/

testing of belt or restraint system before dynamic test:

6.2.2.4.

Durability of buckle

X

X

6.2.1.2/7.2.

Corrosion resistance of rigid parts

X

X

Conditioning of retractors:

6.2.5.2.1./6.2.5.3.1./6.2.5.3.3./7.6.2.

Locking threshold

X

X

6.2.5.2.2./6.2.5.3.2./7.6.4

Retracting force

X

X

6.2.5.2.3./6.2.5.3.3./7.6.1.

Durability

X

X

6.2.5.2.3./6.2.5.3.3./7.2.

Corrosion

X

X

6.2.5.2.3./6.2.5.3.3./7.6.3.

Dust

X

X

6.3.1.2./7.4.2.3.

Testing of strap width

X

X

Strap strength test after:

6.3.2./7.4.1.1./7.4.2.

Room conditioning

X

X

6.3.3./7.4.1.2./7.4.2.

Light conditioning

X

X

6.3.3./7.4.1.3./7.4.2.

Low -temperature conditioning

X

X

6.3.3./7.4.1.4./7.4.2.

Heat conditioning

X

X

6.3.3./7.4.1.5./7.4.2.

Water conditioning

X

X

6.2.3.2/7.3.

Microslip test

X

X

6.4.2./7.4.1.6.

Abrasion test

X

X

6.4.1./7.7.

Dynamic test

X

X

6.2.2.5./6.2.2.7./7.8.

Buckle-opening test

X

X

7.1.4.

Retention of strap sample

X

---

ANNEX 14

CONTROL OF CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

1.   TESTS

Safety-belts shall be required to demonstrate compliance with the requirements on which the following tests are based:

1.1.   Verification of the locking threshold and durability of emergency locking retractors

According to the provisions of paragraph 7.6.2 in the most unfavourable direction as appropriate after having undergone the durability testing detailed in paragraphs 7.6.1, 7.2, and 7.6.3 as a requirement of paragraph 6.2.5.3.5 of this Regulation.

1.2.   Verification of the durability of automatically-locking retractors

According to the provisions of paragraph 7.6.1 supplemented by the tests in paragraphs 7.2 and 7.6.3 as a requirement of paragraph 6.2.5.2.3 of this Regulation.

1.3.   Test for strength of straps after conditioning

According to the procedure described in paragraph 7.4.2 after conditioning according to the requirements of paragraph 7.4.1.1 to 7.4.1.5 of this Regulation.

1.3.1.   Test for strength of straps after abrasion

According to the procedure described in paragraph 7.4.2 after conditioning according to the requirements described in paragraph 7.4.1.6 of this Regulation.

1.4.   Microslip test

According to the procedure described in paragraph 7.3 of this Regulation.

1.5.   Test of the rigid parts

According to the procedure described in paragraph 7.5 of this Regulation.

1.6.   Verification of the performance requirements of the safety-belt or restraint system when subjected to the dynamic test

1.6.1.   Tests with conditioning

| 1.6.1.1. | Belts or restraint systems fitted with an emergency locking retractor according to the provisions set out in paragraphs 7.7 and 7.8 of this Regulation, using a belt which has previously been subjected to 45 000 cycles of the endurance test of the retractor prescribed in paragraph 7.6.1 of this Regulation and to the tests defined in paragraphs 6.2.2.4, 7.2 and 7.6.3 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.1.1.

| 1.6.1.2. | Belts or restraint systems fitted with an automatically-locking retractor: according to the provisions set out in paragraphs 7.7 and 7.8 of this Regulation, using a belt which has previously been subjected to 10 000 cycles of the endurance test of the retractor prescribed in paragraph 7.6.1 and also to the tests prescribed in paragraphs 6.2.2.4, 7.2 and 7.6.3 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.1.2.

| 1.6.1.3. | Static belts: according to the provisions set out in paragraphs 7.7. and 7.8. of this Regulation, on a safety-belt which has been subjected to the test prescribed in paragraphs 6.2.2.4 and 7.2 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.1.3.

1.6.2.   Test without any conditioning

According to the provisions set out in paragraphs 7.7 and 7.8 of this Regulation.

2.   TEST FREQUENCY AND RESULTS

| 2.1. | The frequency of testing to the requirements of paragraphs 1.1 to 1.5 of this annex shall be on a statistically controlled and random basis in accordance with one of the regular quality assurance procedures. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.1.1. | Furthermore, in the case of emergency locking retractors, all assemblies shall be checked: |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.

| 2.1.1.1. | Either according to the provisions set out in paragraphs 7.6.2.1 and 7.6.2.2 of this Regulation, in the most unfavourable direction as specified in paragraph 7.6.2.1.2. Test results shall meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.5.3.1.1 and 6.2.5.3.3 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.1.

| 2.1.1.2. | Or according to the provisions set out in paragraph 7.6.2.3 of this Regulation, in the most unfavourable direction. Nevertheless, the speed of inclination can be more than the prescribed speed insofar as it does not affect the test results. Test results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 6.2.5.3.1.4 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

| 2.2. | In the case of compliance with the dynamic test according to paragraph 1.6 of this annex, this shall be carried out with a minimum frequency of: |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

2.2.1.   Tests with conditioning

| 2.2.1.1. | In the case of belts fitted with an emergency locking retractor,






  — | where the daily production is greater than 1 000 belts: one in 100 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one every two weeks, |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.2.1.1.

—

where the daily production is greater than 1 000 belts: one in 100 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one every two weeks,

| — | where the daily production is smaller than or equal to 1 000 belts: one in 10 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one per year, per sort of locking mechanism (1), |
| --- | --- |

—

where the daily production is smaller than or equal to 1 000 belts: one in 10 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one per year, per sort of locking mechanism (1),

shall be subjected to the test prescribed in paragraph 1.6.1.1 of this annex.

| 2.2.1.2. | In the case of belts fitted with an automatically-locking retractor and of static belts,






  — | where the daily production is greater than 1 000 belts: one in 100 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one every two weeks, |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.2.1.2.

—

where the daily production is greater than 1 000 belts: one in 100 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one every two weeks,

| — | where the daily production is smaller than or equal to 1 000 belts: one in 10 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one per year, |
| --- | --- |

—

where the daily production is smaller than or equal to 1 000 belts: one in 10 000 belts produced, with a minimum frequency of one per year,

shall be subjected to the test prescribed in paragraphs 1.6.1.2 or 1.6.1.3 of this annex respectively.

2.2.2.   Tests without conditioning

| 2.2.2.1. | In the case of belts fitted with an emergency locking retractor, the following number of samples shall be subject to the test prescribed in paragraph 1.6.2 above: |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.1.

| 2.2.2.1.1. | for a production of not less than 5 000 belts per day, two belts per 25 000 produced with a minimum frequency of one per day, per sort of locking mechanism; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.1.1.

| 2.2.2.1.2. | for a production of less than 5 000 belts per day, one belt per 5 000 produced with a minimum frequency of one per year, per sort of locking mechanism; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.1.2.

| 2.2.2.2. | In the case of belts fitted with an automatically-locking retractor and of static belts, the following number of samples shall be subjected to the test prescribed in paragraph 1.6.2. above; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.2.

| 2.2.2.2.1. | for a production of not less than 5 000 belts per day, two belts per 25 000 produced with a minimum of one per day, per approved type; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.2.1.

| 2.2.2.2.2. | for a production of less than 5 000 belts per day, one belt per 5 000 produced with a minimum frequency of one per year, per approved type; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.2.2.

2.2.3.   Results

Test results shall meet the requirements set out in paragraph 6.4.1.3.1 of this Regulation.

The forward displacement of the manikin may be controlled with regard to paragraph 6.4.1.3.2 of this Regulation (or 6.4.1.4 where applicable) during a test performed with conditioning according to paragraph 1.6.1 of this annex by means of a simplified adapted method.

| 2.2.3.1. | In the case of approval following paragraph 6.4.1.3.3 of this Regulation and paragraph 1.6.1 of this annex, it is only specified that no part of the belt shall be destructed or disengaged, and that a speed of 24 km/h of the chest reference point at 300 mm displacement shall not be exceeded. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.1.

| 2.3. | Where a test sample fails a particular test to which it has been subjected, a further test to the same requirements shall be carried out on at least three other samples. In the case of dynamic tests, if one of the latter fails the test, the holder of the approval or his duly accredited representative shall notify the competent authority which has granted type approval indicating what steps have been taken to re-establish the conformity of production. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

---

(1)  For the purposes of this annex, ‘sort of locking mechanism’ means all emergency locking retractors whose mechanisms differ only in the lead angle(s) of the sensing device to the vehicle's reference axis system.

---

ANNEX 15

PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES

1.   PURPOSE

The procedure described in this annex is used to establish the ‘H’ point location and the actual torso angle for one or several seating positions in a motor vehicle and to verify the relationship of measured data to design specifications given by the vehicle manufacturer (1).

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this annex:

| 2.1. | ‘Reference data’ means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position: |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.1.1. | the ‘H’ point and the ‘R’ point and their relationship, |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.

| 2.1.2. | the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.

| 2.2. | ‘Three-dimensional “H” point machine’ (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | ‘“H” point’ means the pivot centre of the torso and the thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The ‘H’ point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the ‘H’ point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The ‘H’ point corresponds theoretically to the ‘R’ point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the ‘H’ point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | ‘“R” point’ or ‘seating reference point’ means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system; |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | ‘Torso-line’ means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.6. | ‘Actual torso angle’ means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below): |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

| 2.7. | ‘Design torso angle’ means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

| 2.8. | ‘Centreplane of occupant’ (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

| 2.9. | ‘Three-dimensional reference system’ means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex; |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

| 2.10. | ‘Fiducial marks’ are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

| 2.11. | ‘Vehicle measuring attitude’ means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

3.   REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   Data presentation

For each seating position where reference data are required in order to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of the present Regulation, all or an appropriate selection of the following data shall be presented in the form indicated in Appendix 3 to this annex:

| 3.1.1. | the co-ordinates of the ‘R’ point relative to the three-dimensional reference system; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

| 3.1.2. | the design torso angle; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

| 3.1.3. | all indications necessary to adjust the seat (if it is adjustable) to the measuring position set out in paragraph 4.3 below. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

3.2.   Relationship between measured data and design specifications

| 3.2.1. | The co-ordinates of the ‘H’ point and the value of the actual torso angle obtained by the procedure set out in paragraph 4 below shall be compared, respectively, with the co-ordinates of the ‘R’ point and the value of the design torso angle indicated by the vehicle manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

| 3.2.2. | The relative positions of the ‘R’ point and the ‘H’ point and the relationship between the design torso angle and the actual torso angle shall be considered satisfactory for the seating position in question if the ‘H’ point, as defined by its co-ordinates, lies within a square of 50 mm side length with horizontal and vertical sides whose diagonals intersect at the ‘R’ point, and if the actual torso angle is within 5o of the design torso angle. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

| 3.2.3. | If these conditions are met, the ‘R’ point and the design torso angle, shall be used to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

| 3.2.4. | If the ‘H’ point or the actual torso angle does not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 above, the ‘H’ point and the actual torso angle shall be determined twice more (three times in all). If the results of two of these three operations satisfy the requirements, the conditions of paragraph 3.2.3 above shall apply. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

| 3.2.5. | If the results of at least two of the three operations described in paragraph 3.2.4 above do not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 above, or if the verification cannot take place because the vehicle manufacturer has failed to supply information regarding the position of the ‘R’ point or regarding the design torso angle, the centroid of the three measured points or the average of the three measured angles shall be used and be regarded as applicable in all cases where the ‘R’ point or the design torso angle is referred to in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

4.   PROCEDURE FOR ‘H’ POINT AND ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE DETERMINATION

| 4.1. | The vehicle shall be preconditioned at the manufacturer's discretion, at a temperature of 20 ± 10 oC to ensure that the seat material reached room temperature. If the seat to be checked has never been sat upon, a 70 to 80 kg person or device shall sit on the seat twice for one minute to flex the cushion and back. At the manufacturer's request, all seat assemblies shall remain unloaded for a minimum period of 30 minutes prior to installation of the 3-D H machine. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

| 4.2. | The vehicle shall be at the measuring attitude defined in paragraph 2.11 above. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

| 4.3. | The seat, if it is adjustable, shall be adjusted first to the rearmost normal driving or riding position, as indicated by the vehicle manufacturer, taking into consideration only the longitudinal adjustment of the seat, excluding seat travel used for purposes other than normal driving or riding positions. Where other modes of seat adjustment exist (vertical, angular, seat-back, etc.) these will then be adjusted to the position specified by the vehicle manufacturer. For suspension seats, the vertical position shall be rigidly fixed corresponding to a normal driving position as specified by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

| 4.4. | The area of the seating position contacted by the 3-D H machine shall be covered by a muslin cotton, of sufficient size and appropriate texture, described as a plain cotton fabric having 18,9 threads per cm2 and weighing 0,228 kg/m2 or knitted or non-woven fabric having equivalent characteristics. If the test is run on a seat outside the vehicle, the floor on which the seat is placed shall have the same essential characteristics (2) as the floor of the vehicle in which the seat is intended to be used. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

| 4.5. | Place the seat and back assembly of the 3-D H machine so that the centreplane of the occupant (C/LO) coincides with the centreplane of the 3-D H machine. At the manufacturer's request, the 3-D H machine may be moved inboard with respect to the C/LO if the 3-D H machine is located so far outboard that the seat edge will not permit levelling of the 3-D H machine. |
| --- | --- |

4.5.

| 4.6. | Attach the foot and lower leg assemblies to the seat pan assembly, either individually or by using the T-bar and lower leg assembly. A line through the ‘H’ point sight buttons shall be parallel to the ground and perpendicular to the longitudinal centreplane of the seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.6.

| 4.7. | Adjust the feet and leg positions of the 3-D H machine as follows: |
| --- | --- |

4.7.

4.7.1.   Designated seating position: driver and outside front passenger

| 4.7.1.1. | Both feet and leg assemblies shall be moved forward in such a way that the feet take up natural positions on the floor, between the operating pedals if necessary. Where possible the left foot shall be located approximately the same distance to the left of the centreplane of the 3-D H machine as the right foot is to the right. The spirit level verifying the transverse orientation of the 3-D H machine is brought to the horizontal by readjustment of the seat pan if necessary, or by adjusting the leg and foot assemblies towards the rear. The line passing through the ‘H’ point sight buttons shall be maintained perpendicular to the longitudinal centreplane of the seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.1.1.

| 4.7.1.2. | If the left leg cannot be kept parallel to the right leg and the left foot cannot be supported by the structure, move the left foot until it is supported. The alignment of the sight buttons shall be maintained. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.1.2.

4.7.2.   Designated seating position: outboard rear

For rear seats or auxiliary seats, the legs are located as specified by the manufacturer. If the feet then rest on parts of the floor which are at different levels, the foot which first comes into contact with the front seat shall serve as a reference and the other foot shall be so arranged that the spirit level giving the transverse orientation of the seat of the device indicates the horizontal.

4.7.3.   Other designated seating positions:

The general procedure indicated in paragraph 4.7.1 above shall be followed except that the feet shall be placed as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.

| 4.8. | Apply lower leg and thigh weights and level the 3-D H machine. |
| --- | --- |

4.8.

| 4.9. | Tilt the back pan forward against the forward stop and draw the 3-D H machine away from the seat-back using the T-bar. Reposition the 3-D H machine on the seat by one of the following methods: |
| --- | --- |

4.9.

| 4.9.1. | If the 3-D H machine tends to slide rearward, use the following procedure. Allow the 3-D H machine to slide rearward until a forward horizontal restraining load on the T-bar is no longer required i.e. until the seat pan contacts the seat-back. If necessary, reposition the lower leg. |
| --- | --- |

4.9.1.

| 4.9.2. | If the 3-D H machine does not tend to slide rearward, use the following procedure. Slide the 3-D H machine rearwards by applying a horizontal rearward load to the T-bar until the seat pan contacts the seat-back (see figure 2 of Appendix 1 to this annex). |
| --- | --- |

4.9.2.

| 4.10. | Apply a 100 ± 10 N load to the back and pan assembly of the 3-D H machine at the intersection of the hip angle quadrant and the T-bar housing. The direction of load application shall be maintained along a line passing by the above intersection to a point just above the thigh bar housing (see figure 2 of Appendix 1 to this annex). Then carefully return the back pan to the seat-back. Care must be exercised throughout the remainder of the procedure to prevent the 3-D H machine from sliding forward. |
| --- | --- |

4.10.

| 4.11. | Install the right and left buttock weights and then, alternately, the eight torso weights. Maintain the 3-D H machine level. |
| --- | --- |

4.11.

| 4.12. | Tilt the back pan forward to release the tension on the seat-back. Rock the 3-D H machine from side to side through a 10o arc (5o to each side of the vertical centreplane) for three complete cycles to release any accumulated friction between the 3-D H machine and the seat.
  During the rocking action, the T-bar of the 3-D H machine may tend to diverge from the specified horizontal and vertical alignment. The T-bar must therefore be restrained by applying an appropriate lateral load during the rocking motions. Care shall be exercised in holding the T-bar and rocking the 3-D H machine to ensure that no inadvertent exterior loads are applied in a vertical or fore and aft direction.
  The feet of the 3-D H machine are not to be restrained or held during this step. If the feet change position, they should be allowed to remain in that attitude for the moment.
  Carefully return the back pan to the seat-back and check the two spirit levels for zero position. If any movement of the feet has occurred during the rocking operation of the 3-D H machine, they must be repositioned as follows:
  Alternately, lift each foot off the floor the minimum necessary amount until no additional foot movement is obtained. During this lifting, the feet are to be free to rotate; and no forward or lateral loads are to be applied. When each foot is placed back in the down position, the heel is to be in contact with the structure designed for this.
  Check the lateral spirit level for zero position; if necessary, apply a lateral load to the top of the back pan sufficient to level the 3-D H machine's seat pan on the seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.12.

During the rocking action, the T-bar of the 3-D H machine may tend to diverge from the specified horizontal and vertical alignment. The T-bar must therefore be restrained by applying an appropriate lateral load during the rocking motions. Care shall be exercised in holding the T-bar and rocking the 3-D H machine to ensure that no inadvertent exterior loads are applied in a vertical or fore and aft direction.

The feet of the 3-D H machine are not to be restrained or held during this step. If the feet change position, they should be allowed to remain in that attitude for the moment.

Carefully return the back pan to the seat-back and check the two spirit levels for zero position. If any movement of the feet has occurred during the rocking operation of the 3-D H machine, they must be repositioned as follows:

Alternately, lift each foot off the floor the minimum necessary amount until no additional foot movement is obtained. During this lifting, the feet are to be free to rotate; and no forward or lateral loads are to be applied. When each foot is placed back in the down position, the heel is to be in contact with the structure designed for this.

Check the lateral spirit level for zero position; if necessary, apply a lateral load to the top of the back pan sufficient to level the 3-D H machine's seat pan on the seat.

| 4.13. | Holding the T-bar to prevent the 3-D H machine from sliding forward on the seat cushion, proceed as follows:






  (a) | return the back pan to the seat-back; |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.13.

(a)

return the back pan to the seat-back;

| (b) | alternately apply and release a horizontal rearward load, not to exceed 25 N, to the back angle bar at a height approximately at the centre of the torso weights until the hip angle quadrant indicates that a stable position has been reached after load release. Care shall be exercised to ensure that no exterior downward or lateral loads are applied to the 3-D H machine. If another level adjustment of the 3-D H machine is necessary, rotate the back pan forward, re-level, and repeat the procedure from paragraph 4.12. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

alternately apply and release a horizontal rearward load, not to exceed 25 N, to the back angle bar at a height approximately at the centre of the torso weights until the hip angle quadrant indicates that a stable position has been reached after load release. Care shall be exercised to ensure that no exterior downward or lateral loads are applied to the 3-D H machine. If another level adjustment of the 3-D H machine is necessary, rotate the back pan forward, re-level, and repeat the procedure from paragraph 4.12.

| 4.14. | Take all measurements: |
| --- | --- |

4.14.

| 4.14.1. | The co-ordinates of the ‘H’ point are measured with respect to the three-dimensional reference system. |
| --- | --- |

4.14.1.

| 4.14.2. | The actual torso angle is read at the back angle quadrant of the 3-D H machine with the probe in its fully rearward position. |
| --- | --- |

4.14.2.

| 4.15. | If a re-run of the installation of the 3-D H machine is desired the seat assembly should remain unloaded for a minimum period of 30 minutes prior to the re-run. The 3-D H machine should not be left loaded on the seat assembly longer than the time required to perform the test. |
| --- | --- |

4.15.

| 4.16. | If the seats in the same row can be regarded as similar (bench seat, identical seats, etc.) only one ‘H’ point and one ‘actual torso angle’ shall be determined for each row of seats, the 3-D H machine described in Appendix 1 to this annex being seated in a place regarded as representative for the row. This place shall be: |
| --- | --- |

4.16.

| 4.16.1. | in the case of the front row, the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- |

4.16.1.

| 4.16.2. | in the case of the rear row or rows, an outer seat. |
| --- | --- |

4.16.2.

---

(1)  In any seating position other than front seats where the ‘H’ point cannot be determined using the ‘Three-dimensional “H” point machine’ or procedures, the ‘R’ point indicated by the manufacturer may be taken as a reference at the discretion of the competent authority.

(2)  Tilt angle, height difference with a seat mounting, surface.

Appendix 1

DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE DIMENSIONAL ‘H’ POINT MACHINE
   (*1)

(3-D H machine)

1.   BACK AND SEAT PANS

The back and seat pans are constructed of reinforced plastic and metal; they simulate the human torso and thigh and are mechanically hinged at the ‘H’ point. A quadrant is fastened to the probe hinged at the ‘H’ point to measure the actual torso angle. An adjustable thigh bar, attached to the seat pan, establishes the thigh centreline and serves as a baseline for the hip angle quadrant.

2.   BODY AND LEG ELEMENTS

Lower leg segments are connected to the seat pan assembly at the T-bar joining the knees, which is a lateral extension of the adjustable thigh bar. Quadrants are incorporated in the lower leg segments to measure knee angles. Shoe and foot assemblies are calibrated to measure the foot angle. Two spirit levels orient the device in space. Body element weights are placed at the corresponding centres of gravity to provide seat penetration equivalent to a 76 kg male. All joints of the 3-D H machine should be checked for free movement without encountering noticeable friction.

Figure 1

3-D H machine elements designation

Head room probe

Back pan

Back angle quadrant

H-point sight button

H-point pivot

Thigh bar

Knee angle quadrant

Foot angle quadrant

T-bar joining the knees

Thigh weight pad

Seat pan

Hip angle quadrant

Back angle level

Torso weight hanger

Lateral level

Figure 2

Dimensions of the 3-D machine elements and load distribution

Torso weight

Buttock weight

Thigh weight

Leg weight

Direction and point of application of load

Variable from 108 to 424

---

(*1)  For details of the construction of the 3-D H machine refer to Society of Automobile Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15096, United States of America.

The machine corresponds to that described in Standard ISO 6549:1980.

Appendix 2

THREE-DIMENSIONAL REFERENCE SYSTEM

1.

The three-dimensional reference system is defined by three orthogonal planes established by the vehicle manufacturer (see figure) (*1).

2.

The vehicle measuring attitude is established by positioning the vehicle on the supporting surface such that the co-ordinates of the fiducial marks correspond to the values indicated by the manufacturer.

3.

The co-ordinates of the ‘R’ point and the ‘H’ point are established in relation to the fiducial marks defined by the vehicle manufacturer.

Figure

Three dimensional reference system

Zero X plane (vertical transverse zero plane)

Zero Y plane (vertical longitudinal zero plane)

Zero Z plane (horizontal zero plane)

Supporting surface

---

(*1)  The reference system corresponds to Standard ISO 4130:1978.

*1

Appendix 3

REFERENCE DATA CONCERNING SEATING POSITIONS

1.   CODING OF REFERENCE DATA

Reference data are listed consecutively for each seating position. Seating positions are identified by a two-digit code. The first digit is an Arabic numeral and designates the row of seats, counting from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The second digit is a capital letter which designates the location of the seating position in a row, as viewed in the direction of forward motion of the vehicle; the following letters shall be used:

| L | = | left |
| --- | --- | --- |
| C | = | centre |
| R | = | right |

L

=

left

C

=

centre

R

=

right

2.   DESCRIPTION OF VEHICLE MEASURING ATTITUDE

| 2.1. | Co-ordinates of fiducial marks
  X ..............................
  Y ..............................
  Z .............................. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

X ..............................

Y ..............................

Z ..............................

3.   LIST OF REFERENCE DATA

| 3.1. | Seating position: .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.1.1. | Co-ordinates of ‘R’ point
  X ..............................
  Y ..............................
  Z .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

X ..............................

Y ..............................

Z ..............................

| 3.1.2. | Design torso angle: .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

| 3.1.3. | Specifications for seat adjustment (*1)

  horizontal : ..............................
  vertical : ..............................
  angular : ..............................
  torso angle: .............................. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

horizontal : ..............................

vertical : ..............................

angular : ..............................

torso angle: ..............................

Note: List reference data for further seating positions under paragraphs 3.2, 3.3, etc.

---

(*1)  Strike out what does not apply.

---

ANNEX 16

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY-BELTS AND RETRACTORS

| Vehicle Category | Forward facing seating positions | Rear facing Seating positions |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Outboard seating positions | Centre seating position |
| Front | Other than front | Front | Other than front |
| M1 | Ar4m | Ar4m | Ar4m | Ar4m | B, Br3, Br4m |
| M2 ≤ 3,5 t | Ar4m, Ar4Nm | Ar4m, Ar4Nm | Ar4m, Ar4Nm | Ar4m, Ar4Nm | Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm |
| M2 > 3,5 t
  M3 | Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm, or Ar4m or Ar4Nm • | Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm, or Ar4m or Ar4Nm • | Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or Ar4m or Ar4Nm • | Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or Ar4m or Ar4Nm • | Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm |
| See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted | See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted | See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted | See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted | |
| N1 | Ar4m, Ar4Nm | Ar4m, Ar4Nm, Br4m,
  Br4Nm Ø | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or A, Ar4m, Ar4Nm * (1) | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm |
| | Para. 8.1.2.1 lap belt permitted if seat is inboard of a passageway | Para. 8.1.6 lap belt permitted if the windscreen is not in the reference zone. | | |
| N2
  N3 | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or A, Ar4m, Ar4Nm * | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm, or A, Ar4m, Ar4Nm * | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm | B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm |
| Para. 8.1.6 lap belt permitted if the windscreen is outside the reference zone and for the driver's seat. | | Para. 8.1.6 lap belt permitted if the windscreen is not in the reference zone. | | |
| A: three-point (lap and diagonal) belt
  3: automatically locking retractor
  *: Refers to para. 8.1.6 of this Regulation (2) | B: 2-point (lap) belt
  4: emergency locking retractor
  Ø: Refers to para. 8.1.2.1 of this Regulation | r: retractor
  N: higher response threshold
  •: refers to para. 8.1.7 of this Regulation (2) | m: emergency locking retractor with multiple sensitivity
  (see Regulation No 16, paras. 2.14.3 and 2.14.5) |
| Note: In all cases all S-type belts may be fitted in place of all possible A or B type belts, provided their anchorages comply with Regulation No 14.
  Where a harness belt has been approved as a S-type belt according to this Regulation, using the lap belt strap, the shoulder belt straps and possibly one or more retractors, one or two additional crotch straps including their attachments for their anchorages may be provided by the manufacturer/applicant. These additional anchorages need not meet the requirements of Regulation No 14 (Erratum to Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments, applicable ‘ab initio.’ |

Vehicle Category

Forward facing seating positions

Rear facing Seating positions

Outboard seating positions

Centre seating position

Front

Other than front

Front

Other than front

M1

Ar4m

Ar4m

Ar4m

Ar4m

B, Br3, Br4m

M2 ≤ 3,5 t

Ar4m, Ar4Nm

Ar4m, Ar4Nm

Ar4m, Ar4Nm

Ar4m, Ar4Nm

Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

M2 > 3,5 t

M3

Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm, or Ar4m or Ar4Nm •

Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm, or Ar4m or Ar4Nm •

Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or Ar4m or Ar4Nm •

Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or Ar4m or Ar4Nm •

Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted

See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted

See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted

See para. 8.1.7 for conditions when a lap belt is permitted

N1

Ar4m, Ar4Nm

Ar4m, Ar4Nm, Br4m,

Br4Nm Ø

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or A, Ar4m, Ar4Nm * (1)

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

Para. 8.1.2.1 lap belt permitted if seat is inboard of a passageway

Para. 8.1.6 lap belt permitted if the windscreen is not in the reference zone.

N2

N3

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm or A, Ar4m, Ar4Nm *

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm, or A, Ar4m, Ar4Nm *

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

B, Br3, Br4m, Br4Nm

Para. 8.1.6 lap belt permitted if the windscreen is outside the reference zone and for the driver's seat.

Para. 8.1.6 lap belt permitted if the windscreen is not in the reference zone.

A: three-point (lap and diagonal) belt

3: automatically locking retractor

*: Refers to para. 8.1.6 of this Regulation (2)

B: 2-point (lap) belt

4: emergency locking retractor

Ø: Refers to para. 8.1.2.1 of this Regulation

r: retractor

N: higher response threshold

•: refers to para. 8.1.7 of this Regulation (2)

m: emergency locking retractor with multiple sensitivity

(see Regulation No 16, paras. 2.14.3 and 2.14.5)

Note: In all cases all S-type belts may be fitted in place of all possible A or B type belts, provided their anchorages comply with Regulation No 14.

Where a harness belt has been approved as a S-type belt according to this Regulation, using the lap belt strap, the shoulder belt straps and possibly one or more retractors, one or two additional crotch straps including their attachments for their anchorages may be provided by the manufacturer/applicant. These additional anchorages need not meet the requirements of Regulation No 14 (Erratum to Supplement 14 to the 04 series of amendments, applicable ‘ab initio.’

---

(1)  Erratum to Supplement 12 to the 04 series of amendments, applicable ‘ab initio.’

(2)  Erratum to Revision 4, applicable ‘ab initio.’

---

ANNEX 17

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF SAFETY-BELTS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FOR ADULT OCCUPANTS OF POWER-DRIVEN VEHICLES ON FORWARD FACING SEATS AND FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

1.   COMPATIBILITY WITH CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

| 1.1. | The vehicle manufacturer shall include in the vehicle handbook advice on the suitability of each passenger seat position for the carriage of children up to 12 years old (or up to 1,5 m tall), or the fitting of child restraint systems. This information shall be given in the national language, or at least one of the national languages, of the country in which the vehicle is offered for sale.
  For each forward-facing passenger seat position, and for each Isofix position, the vehicle manufacturer shall either:






  (a) | Indicate that the seat position is suitable for child restraints of the ‘universal’ category (see paragraph 1.2 below); |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.1.

For each forward-facing passenger seat position, and for each Isofix position, the vehicle manufacturer shall either:

(a)

Indicate that the seat position is suitable for child restraints of the ‘universal’ category (see paragraph 1.2 below);

| (b) | Indicate if the Isofix position is suitable for Isofix child restraint systems of the ‘universal’ category (see paragraph 1.2 below); |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Indicate if the Isofix position is suitable for Isofix child restraint systems of the ‘universal’ category (see paragraph 1.2 below);

| (c) | Provide a list of child restraint systems of the ‘semi-universal’, ‘restricted’ or ‘vehicle-specific’ categories, suitable for that vehicle seating position, indicating the mass group(s) for which the restraints are intended; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

Provide a list of child restraint systems of the ‘semi-universal’, ‘restricted’ or ‘vehicle-specific’ categories, suitable for that vehicle seating position, indicating the mass group(s) for which the restraints are intended;

| (d) | Provide a list of Isofix child restraint systems of the ‘semi-universal’, ‘restricted’ or ‘vehicle specific’ categories, suitable for that vehicle Isofix position, indicating the mass group and the Isofix size class for which the Isofix child restraints are intended; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

Provide a list of Isofix child restraint systems of the ‘semi-universal’, ‘restricted’ or ‘vehicle specific’ categories, suitable for that vehicle Isofix position, indicating the mass group and the Isofix size class for which the Isofix child restraints are intended;

| (e) | Provide a built-in child restraint system, indicating the mass group(s) for which the restraint is intended and the corresponding configuration(s); |
| --- | --- |

(e)

Provide a built-in child restraint system, indicating the mass group(s) for which the restraint is intended and the corresponding configuration(s);

| (f) | Provide any combination of (a), (b), (c), (d), (e); |
| --- | --- |

(f)

Provide any combination of (a), (b), (c), (d), (e);

| (g) | Indicate the mass group(s) of the children which shall not be carried in that seat position. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

Indicate the mass group(s) of the children which shall not be carried in that seat position.

If a seat position is only suitable for use with forward-facing child restraint systems, this shall be indicated.

Tables in a suitable format for the above information are given in Appendix 3 to this annex.

| 1.2. | A child restraint system or Isofix child restraint system, of the universal category means a child restraint approved to the ‘universal’ category of Regulation No 44, Supplement 5 to 03 series of amendments. Seat positions, or Isofix positions, which are indicated by the vehicle manufacturer as being suitable for the installation of child restraints systems or Isofix child restraints systems shall comply with the provisions of Appendix 1 or 2 to this annex. Where applicable any restriction on the simultaneous use on adjacent positions of Isofix child restraint systems and/or between Isofix positions and adult seating positions shall be reported in the table 2 of Appendix 3 to this annex. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

Appendix 1

PROVISIONS CONCERNING THE INSTALLATION OF ‘UNIVERSAL’ CATEGORY CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS INSTALLED WITH THE SAFETY-BELT EQUIPMENT OF THE VEHICLE

1.   GENERAL

| 1.1. | The test procedure and the requirements in this appendix shall be used to determine the suitability of seat positions for the installation of child restraints of the ‘universal’ category. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

| 1.2. | The tests may be carried out in the vehicle or in a representative part of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

2.   TEST PROCEDURE

| 2.1. | Adjust the seat to its fully rearward and lowest position. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | Adjust the seat-back angle to the manufacturer's design position. In the absence of any specification, an angle of 25 degrees from the vertical, or the nearest fixed position of the seat-back, should be used. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | Set the shoulder anchorage to the lowest position. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | Place a cotton cloth on the seat-back and cushion. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | Place the fixture (as described in figure 1 of this appendix) on the vehicle seat. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.6. | If the seating position is intended to accommodate a forward-facing or rearward-facing universal restraint system, proceed according to paragraphs 2.6.1, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9 and 2.10. If the seating position is intended to accommodate only a forward-facing universal restraint system, proceed according to paragraphs 2.6.2, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9 and 2.10. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

| 2.6.1. | Arrange the safety-belt strap around the fixture in approximately the correct position as shown in figures 2 and 3, then latch the buckle. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.1.

| 2.6.2. | Arrange the safety-belt lap strap approximately in the correct position around the lower part of the fixture of 150 mm radius as shown in Figure 3, then latch the buckle. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.2.

| 2.7. | Ensure that the fixture is located with its centreline on the apparent centreline of the seating position ± 25 mm with its centreline parallel with the centreline of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

| 2.8. | Ensure that all webbing slack is removed. Use sufficient force to remove the slack, do not attempt to tension the webbing. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

| 2.9. | Push rearwards on the centre of the front of the fixture with a force of 100 N ± 10 N, applied parallel to the lower surface, and remove the force. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

| 2.10. | Push vertically downwards on the centre of the upper surface of the fixture with a force of 100 N ± 10 N, and remove the force. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

3.   REQUIREMENTS

| 3.1. | The base of the fixture shall contact both the forward and rearward parts of the seat cushion surface. If such contact does not occur due to the belt access gap in the test fixture, this gap may be covered in line with the bottom surface of the test fixture. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.2. | The lap portion of the belt shall touch the fixture on both sides at the rear of the lap belt path (see figure 3). |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

| 3.3. | Should the above requirements not be met with the adjustments indicated in paragraphs 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3, the seat, seat-back and safety-belt anchorages may be adjusted to an alternative position designated by the manufacturer for normal use at which the above installation procedure shall be repeated and the requirements again verified and met. This alternative position shall be included as an information in the Table 1 given in Appendix 3 to this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

Figure 1

Specifications of the fixture

Weight 23 kg evenly distributed

Figure 2

Installation of fixture onto vehicle seat (see paragraph 2.6.1.)

Figure 3

Check for compatibility (see paragraphs 2.6.1. and 3.2.)

Note: The seat belt webbing must contact the curved edge on both sides of the fixture

Buckle

Tongue

Lap belt only shown

Appendix 2

PROVISIONS CONCERNING THE INSTALLATION OF FORWARD-FACING AND REARWARD-FACING ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS OF UNIVERSAL AND SEMI-UNIVERSAL CATEGORIES INSTALLED ON ISOFIX POSITIONS

1.   GENERAL

| 1.1. | The test procedure and the requirements in this appendix shall be used to determine the suitability of Isofix positions for the installation of Isofix child restraint systems of universal and semi-universal categories. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

| 1.2. | The tests may be carried out in the vehicle or in a representative part of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

2.   TEST PROCEDURE

For any Isofix position in the vehicle, as indicated by the car manufacturer, in table 2 of Appendix 3, it has to be checked that it is possible to accommodate the corresponding child restraint fixture(s) (CRF):

| 2.1. | When checking a CRF on a seat, this seat may be adjusted longitudinally to its rearmost position and in its lowest position. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | Adjust the seat-back angle to the manufacturer's design position and the head restraint in the lowest and rearmost position. In the absence of any specification an angle of the seat-back corresponding to a torso angle of 25o from the vertical, or the nearest fixed position of the seat-back, shall be used.
  When checking a CRF on a rear seat, the vehicle seat located in front of this rear seat may be adjusted longitudinally forward but not further than the mid position between its rearmost and fore most positions. The seat backrest angle may also be adjusted, but not to a more upright angle than corresponding to a torso angle of 15o. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

When checking a CRF on a rear seat, the vehicle seat located in front of this rear seat may be adjusted longitudinally forward but not further than the mid position between its rearmost and fore most positions. The seat backrest angle may also be adjusted, but not to a more upright angle than corresponding to a torso angle of 15o.

| 2.3. | Place a cotton cloth on the seat-back and cushion. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | Place the CRF on the Isofix position. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | Push, towards Isofix anchorages system, on the center between the ISOFIX anchorages with a force of 100 N ± 10 N, applied parallel to the lower surface, and remove the force. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.6. | Attach the CRF to the Isofix anchorages system. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

| 2.7. | Push vertically downwards on the centre of the upper surface of the fixture with a force of 100 N ± 10 N, and remove the force. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

3.   REQUIREMENTS

The following testing conditions only apply for the CRF(s) when accommodated in the Isofix position. It is not required that the CRF(s) shall be possible to move in and out of the Isofix position under these conditions.

| 3.1. | It has to be possible to accommodate the CRF(s) without interference with the vehicle interior. The CRF base shall have a pitch angle of 15o ± 10o, above the horizontal plane passing through the Isofix anchorages system. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.2. | The Isofix top tether anchorage, if any, shall remain accessible. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

| 3.3 | Should the above requirements not be met with the adjustments indicated in paragraph 2. above, the seats, the seat-backs, the head restraints may be adjusted to alternative positions designated by the manufacturer for normal use following which the above installation procedure shall be repeated and the requirements verified and met. These alternative positions shall be included as information in Table 2 given in Appendix 3 to this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.3

| 3.4 | Should the above requirements not be fulfilled when some removable interior fittings were present, such fittings may be removed and then requirements of paragraph 3. have to be verified again and fulfilled. In such a case corresponding information shall be included in Table 2 of Appendix 3 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.4

4.   ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM SIZE CLASSES AND FIXTURES

| A | — | ISO/F3: Full-height forward facing toddler CRS |
| --- | --- | --- |
| B | — | ISO/F2: Reduced-height forward facing toddler CRS |
| B1 | — | ISO/F2X: Reduced-height forward facing toddler CRS |
| C | — | ISO/R3: Full-size rearward facing toddler CRS |
| D | — | ISO/R2: Reduced-size rearward facing toddler CRS |
| E | — | ISO/R1: Rearward facing infant CRS |
| F | — | ISO/L1: Left lateral facing position CRS (carry-cot) |
| G | — | ISO/L2: Right lateral facing position CRS (carry-cot) |

A

—

ISO/F3: Full-height forward facing toddler CRS

B

—

ISO/F2: Reduced-height forward facing toddler CRS

B1

—

ISO/F2X: Reduced-height forward facing toddler CRS

C

—

ISO/R3: Full-size rearward facing toddler CRS

D

—

ISO/R2: Reduced-size rearward facing toddler CRS

E

—

ISO/R1: Rearward facing infant CRS

F

—

ISO/L1: Left lateral facing position CRS (carry-cot)

G

—

ISO/L2: Right lateral facing position CRS (carry-cot)

| Mass group | Isofix size class | Fixture (CRF) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 0 — up to 10 kg | F | ISO/L1 |
| G | ISO/L2 |
| E | ISO/R1 |
| 0+ — up to 13 kg | C | ISO/R3 |
| D | ISO/R2 |
| E | ISO/R1 |
| I — 9 to 18 kg | A | ISO/F3 |
| B | ISO/ |
| B1 | ISO/F2X |
| C | ISO/R3 |
| D | ISO/R2 |

Mass group

Isofix size class

Fixture (CRF)

0 — up to 10 kg

F

ISO/L1

G

ISO/L2

E

ISO/R1

0+ — up to 13 kg

C

ISO/R3

D

ISO/R2

E

ISO/R1

I — 9 to 18 kg

A

ISO/F3

B

ISO/

B1

ISO/F2X

C

ISO/R3

D

ISO/R2

The fixtures below shall be constructed with a mass between 5 and 15 kg and shall be of suitable durability and stiffness to satisfy the functional requirements.

4.1.   Full-height forward-facing toddler child restraint systems envelope

Figure 1

ISO/F3 envelope dimensions for a full-height forward-facing toddler CRS (height 720 mm) ISOFIX SIZE CLASS A

Key

| 1 | Limits in the forward and upwards directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | N/A |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44 |

1

Limits in the forward and upwards directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

N/A

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44

4.2.   Reduced-height forward-facing toddler child restraint systems envelope

Figure 2

ISO/F2 envelope dimensions for a reduced-height forward-facing toddler CRS, (height 650 mm) — ISOFIX SIZE CLASS B

Key

| 1 | Limits in the forward and upwards directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | N/A |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44 |
| 5 | Attachment point for the top tether strap |

1

Limits in the forward and upwards directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

N/A

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44

5

Attachment point for the top tether strap

4.3.   Reduced-height second version back shape forward-facing toddler child restraint systems envelope

Figure 3

ISO/F2X envelope dimensions for a reduced-height second version back surface shape forward-facing toddler CRS, (height 650 mm) — ISOFIX SIZE CLASS B1

Key

| 1 | Limits in the forward and upwards directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | N/A |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44 |

1

Limits in the forward and upwards directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

N/A

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44

4.4.   Full-size rearward facing toddler child restraint system envelope

Figure 4

ISO/R3 envelope dimensions for a full-size rearward-facing toddler CRS ISOFIX SIZE CLASS C

Key

| 1 | Limits in the rearward and upwards directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | The backwards limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2 |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44 |

1

Limits in the rearward and upwards directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

The backwards limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44

4.5.   Reduced-size rearward-facing toddler child restraint systems envelope

Figure 5

ISO/R2 envelope dimensions for a reduced-size rearward-facing toddler CRS ISOFIX SIZE CLASS D

Key

| 1 | Limits in the rearward and upwards directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | The backwards limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2 |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44 |

1

Limits in the rearward and upwards directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

The backwards limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44

4.6.   Rearward facing infant child restraint systems envelope

Figure 6

ISO/R1 envelope dimensions for an infant-size rearward-facing CRS ISOFIX SIZE CLASS E

Key

| 1 | Limits in the rearward and upward directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | The backwards limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2 |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44 |

1

Limits in the rearward and upward directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

The backwards limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in Regulation No 44

4.7.   Lateral facing child restraint systems envelope

Figure 7

Envelope dimensions for lateral facing position CRS — ISO/L1- ISOFIX SIZE CLASS F or symmetrically opposite — ISO/L2 — ISOFIX CLASS G

Key

| 1 | Limits in the rearward and upward directions |
| --- | --- |
| 2 | Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude |
| 3 | The backward limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2 |
| 4 | Further specifications of the connector area are given in ISO 13216-1, Figures 2 and 3 |

1

Limits in the rearward and upward directions

2

Dashed line marks area where a support leg, or similar, is allowed to protrude

3

The backward limitation (to the right in the figure) is given by the forward-facing envelope in Figure 2

4

Further specifications of the connector area are given in ISO 13216-1, Figures 2 and 3

Appendix 3

Table 1

Table of vehicle handbook information on child restraint systems installation suitability for various seating positions

| Mass Group | Seating position (or other site) |
| --- | --- |
| | Front passenger | Rear outboard | Rear centre | Intermediate outboard | Intermediate centre |
| Group 0 | up to 10 kg | | | | | |
| Group 0+ | up to 13 kg | | | | | |
| Group I | 9 to 18 kg | | | | | |
| Group II | 15 to 25 kg | | | | | |
| Group III | 22 to 36 kg | | | | | |

Mass Group

Seating position (or other site)

Front passenger

Rear outboard

Rear centre

Intermediate outboard

Intermediate centre

Group 0

up to 10 kg

Group 0+

up to 13 kg

Group I

9 to 18 kg

Group II

15 to 25 kg

Group III

22 to 36 kg

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:

| U | = | Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| UF | = | Suitable for forward-facing ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group. |
| L | = | Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories. |
| B | = | Built-in restraint approved for this mass group. |
| X | = | Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group. |

U

=

Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

UF

=

Suitable for forward-facing ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

L

=

Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.

B

=

Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.

X

=

Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

Table 2

Table of vehicle handbook information on isofix child restraint systems installation suitability for various ISOFIX positions

| Mass Group | Size class | Fixture | Vehicle ISOFIX positions |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | | Front passenger | Rear outboard | Rear centre | Intermediate outboard | Intermediate centre | Other sites |
| carrycot | F | ISO/L1 | | | | | | |
| G | ISO/L2 | | | | | | |
| | (1) | | | | | | |
| 0 — up to 10 Kg | E | ISO/R1 | | | | | | |
| | | (1) | | | | | | |
| 0+ — up to 13 kg | E | ISO/R1 | | | | | | |
| D | ISO/R2 | | | | | | |
| C | ISO/R3 | | | | | | |
| | (1) | | | | | | |
| I — 9 to 18 kg | D | ISO/R2 | | | | | | |
| C | ISO/R3 | | | | | | |
| B | ISO/F2 | | | | | | |
| B1 | ISO/F2X | | | | | | |
| A | ISO/F3 | | | | | | |
| | (1) | | | | | | |
| II — 15 to 25 kg | | (1) | | | | | | |
| III — 22 to 36 kg | | (1) | | | | | | |

Mass Group

Size class

Fixture

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Front passenger

Rear outboard

Rear centre

Intermediate outboard

Intermediate centre

Other sites

carrycot

F

ISO/L1

G

ISO/L2

(1)

0 — up to 10 Kg

E

ISO/R1

(1)

0+ — up to 13 kg

E

ISO/R1

D

ISO/R2

C

ISO/R3

(1)

I — 9 to 18 kg

D

ISO/R2

C

ISO/R3

B

ISO/F2

B1

ISO/F2X

A

ISO/F3

(1)

II — 15 to 25 kg

(1)

III — 22 to 36 kg

(1)

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table

| IUF | = | suitable for Isofix forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| IL | = | suitable for particular Isofix child restraint systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These Isofix CRS are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories. |
| X | = | Isofix position not suitable for Isofix child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class. |

IUF

=

suitable for Isofix forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.

IL

=

suitable for particular Isofix child restraint systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These Isofix CRS are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.

X

=

Isofix position not suitable for Isofix child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

---

(1)  For the CRS which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle specific Isofix child restraint system(s) recommended for each position.

---